Home

DB-Access User Manual

1. 5 24 Modifying the Column Index 2 2 2 1 5 25 Modifying the Nulls Entry 2 a 2 1 1 1 1 1 5 26 Dropping a Column 2 2 2 ee ee RT Rebuilding the TableSchema 2 2 2 1 ww 9 28 Displaying Subsequent Table Screens 5 28 Setting Table Options on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server o 15229 Specifying a Storage Location pe e Me ene e 20590 Setting the Initial Extent Size 2 581 Setting the Next Extent Size 2 2 0 0 9 32 Determining the Lock Mode sme Rh ae mcg ro OZ Specifying Table Storage on INFORMIX SE og pak gS ae 5 DEBS Defining Constraints a ek PB mo ae amp 5234 Using the CONSTRAINTS Menu Defining Primary Key Constraints Defining Foreign Key Constraints Working with Check Constraints Working with Unique Constraints Defining Default Values Defining a Fragmentation Strategy The FRAGMENT Menu The ROUND_ROBIN Menu The EXPRESSION Menu Altering a Table The ALTER TABLE Seren Differences Between OnLine and SE Exiting the ALTER TABLE Screen Adding a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu TE Modifying a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu Dropping a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu Using the Screen Option on the ALTER TABLE Menu Changing Table Options with the ALTER TABLE Menu Altering the Fragmentation Strategy of a Table The STORAGE Menu A ee ot The ALTER ROWIDS Menu Al
2. 2 38 How to Get Database Information Menu 2 39 Method 2 Using SQL 1 ww ee a 2 40 How To Create a Database SQL 1 2 41 How to Selecta Database SQL 2 2 42 How to Create a Table SQL 1 ee ee 2 42 Assigning Column Constraints 2 243 Creating an Index on a Table 2 44 How to Modify a Table SQL 2 2 ww 2M Adding a Column to a Table 2 1 we 245 Modifying a Column in a Table 2 1 1 245 Dropping a Column from a Table 246 Renaming a Column in a Table aaa 2 47 Adding and Dropping Constraints 2 47 Modifying Fragmentation Strategy 2 48 2 2 DB Access User Manual How To Get Table Information SQL 2 48 How to Drop a Table SQL 2 2 a a ee eee 250 How to Drop a Database SQL 2 2 1 ww we we 250 How to Close a Database SQL 2 51 Creating Databases and Tables 2 3 2 4 DB Access User Manual his tutorial chapter describes two methods for creating dropping and closing a database and for creating altering and dropping the tables in a database It also shows three ways to get information about the structure of the tables in a database and how to query on the contents of a table The following DB Access facilities are introduced i
3. How to Get Database Information Menu To disconnect from the current database server and close the current database choose the Disconnect option from the CONNECTION menu The DISCONNECT confirmation screen appears as shown in Figure 2 38 Figure 2 38 Using menu options to close a database the DISCONNECT menu Press RETURN and DB Access disconnects from the database server and closes the database How to Get Database Information Menu You can use the Info option from the DATABASE menu to display information about the dbspaces OnLine only NLS collation and Ctype character classi fication type settings and the text of stored procedures for the active database Select the Database option from the main menu and then select the Info option from the DATABASE menu The DATABASE INFO menu appears and offers a choice of the database information options which are described in Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option Tip You must use the DATABASE INFO menu options to get database information There is no SQL statement INFO counterpart in DB Access You can however use a SELECT statement to extract certain database information from relevant system catalog tables See Chapter 2 in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference for details Creating Databases and Tables 2 39 Method 2 Using SQL Method 2 Using SQL SQL provides a flexible efficient method for performing the following functions Creating and
4. we 1385 Getting Help a a a ee 1 35 Using the HELPScreen 2 2 2 2 2 0 85 Using a Text Editor 2 2 a ew 1 36 Using the SQL Editor 2 2 2 2 0 186 Using the Editing Keys 0 0 1 37 Editing Restrictions 2 we 0 1 38 Using a System Editor ee 189 1 2 DB Access User Manual his chapter introduces DB Access It tells you how to get started with DB Access and acquaints you with the various types of menus screens functions and editors that you use when working with the utility The following topics are discussed in this chapter Preparing to use DB Access page 1 6 Setting environment variables for DB Access page 1 6 Using special keys on your terminal page 1 11 Invoking DB Access from the command line page 1 12 Using additional command line features page 1 25 Using the DB Access menu structure page 1 30 Using menus and text entry screens page 1 32 Getting on line help page 1 35 Using the SQL and system text editors page 1 36 To make the best use of DB Access you should understand the basic concepts presented in this chapter This manual also refers to other relevant Informix publications which can be particularly helpful if you have limited experience with computers or database management systems Tip If you are already familiar with DB Access you might prefer to
5. The Table Menu Option 5 75 The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy The ATTACH TABLES Menu Select the aTtach option on the ALTER FRAGMENT expression strategy menu and the ATTACH TABLES menu appears as shown in Figure 5 67 Figure 5 67 ATTACH TABLES new_acct Add Modify Drop Screen Exit The ATTACH Add one new table to the fragmentation strategy TABLES menu for Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help expression Table Name Expression Position Dbspace fragmentation strategy acct fieldl lt 100 BEFORE dbspacel cur_acct fieldl gt 100 This menu allows you to attach one or more tables to an existing expression fragmentation strategy and to define the position of the resulting new fragment within that strategy The ATTACH TABLES menu has the following options Add lets you select a table or tables and expression to attach to the current expression fragmentation strategy The SELECT ATTACHING TABLE screen appears so you can select a table to attach to the current fragmentation strategy Modify lets you modify an existing expression fragmentation strategy definition for attaching a table Drop deletes the highlighted attaching table and expression from the existing list of attaching tables for the strategy It does not drop the table from the OnLine database server Screen pages to the next screen page of attaching tables for the expression fragmentation strategy Exit exits the ATTACH TABLES menu and returns
6. cons3 column2 lt col cons4 column3 gt 100 The CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu displays any previously added check constraints The first 36 characters of the check value appear on the CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu To view the entire text the current field must be Value You must use the Modify option to enter the MODIFY DEFAULT VALUE menu to call up an editor that lets you view the entire text The CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu has the following options Add adds a check constraint name and value for the table Modify changes the name or value of a check constraint Drop drops the current check constraint Screen displays the next screen of check constraints Exit leaves the CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu and returns you to the CONSTRAINTS menu The CHECK CONSTRAINTS Menu the Add Option Select the Add option to add a check constraint for the table and enter the name and value of the constraint The ADD CONSTRAINT NAME prompt appears Enter a name or press RETURN If you press RETURN in this field without specifying a value a temporary constraint name is assigned and it exists until the table is built or discarded 5 40 DB Access User Manual Defining Constraints After the constraint name is added the Value field becomes current and the ADD CHECK VALUE menu appears It lets you select the SOL editor or specify another editor that you can use to enter the check constraint value If you add a constraint or modify its value you go to
7. cur_acct myacct The SELECT ATTACHING TABLE menu displays a list of available tables and prompts you to select one from which the records will be attached to the current table A new fragment is added to the strategy as a result of attaching a table Highlight or type in the table name you want and press RETURN The DETACH DBSPACE Menu Select the detaCh option from the ALTER FRAGMENT round robin fragmen tation strategy menu and the DETACH DBSPACE menu appears as shown in Figure 5 61 T Figure 5 61 DETACH DBSPACE gt gt Select a dbspace with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The DETACH DBSPACE menu for Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help round robin fragmentation strategy dbspace2 dbspace3 The DETACH DBSPACE menu displays a list of dbspaces in the current strategy You can select one from the list or type in a dbspace name If you enter an invalid dbspace name you get an error message E Important You can detach only one table during an ALTER TABLE session The Table Menu Option 5 71 The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy The NEW TABLE Screen After you have correctly entered a dbspace on the DETACH DBSPACE screen the NEW TABLE screen appears as shown in Figure 5 62 Figure 5 62 NEW TABLE gt gt The NEW TABLE Enter the name you want assigned to the new table then press Return screen for round Page 1 of 1 newstores mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help robin
8. Important Although the command files are listed alphabetically in this appendix you cannot execute the command files that create tables in that order without causing errors The order in which the tables are created is very important because of the referential constraints linking those tables Furthermore all of the tables in the stores7 database are created automatically when you run the dbaccessdemo7 script Thus if you try to create a table that already exists in that database you get an error Additional command files not shown in this appendix illustrate the use of native language characters and provide practice with NLS concepts They become available when you install a lan guage supplement with DB Access activate NLS and set the appropriate NLS environment variables Those command files are shown and described in the language supplements For information on the contents and structure of the stores7 database see The stores7 Database Map and the rest of Appendix A of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference alt_cat sql When you select the Choose option on the SOL menu the CHOOSE screen appears It displays a list of the command files that you can access as shown in the following figure CHOOSE gt gt O Choose a command file with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return stores7 dbserverl c_state sel_ojoinl c_calls c_stock d_view sel_ojoin2 c_cat c_stores del_stock sel_ojoin3 c_custom c_table
9. dbaccess A oi a filename indicates that you are not specifying a database in the command line because one is specified in a DATABASE statement in the command file database specifies the name of the current database ilename specifies the name of the command file or SQL script file that P P you want to execute You can include the extension sql which is implied if omitted Enter the following command to execute the SQL statements in the scales sql file on the skink database dbaccess skink scales Enter the following command to execute the SQL statements in the scales sql file on the database specified in that file dbaccess scales sql Echoing File Input to the Screen You can use the echo option to display on the screen all the commands that are executed in a command file as well as the output from the SQL statement s in the command file dbaccess a aaa filename 1 20 DB Access User Manual Echoing File Input to the Screen indicates that you are not specifying a database in the command line because one is specified in an SOL statement in the command file e echoes to the screen all input that is read from a specified file database specifies the name of the database you want to select as the current database filename specifies the name of the command file whose lines are echoed to the screen You can include the extension sql The e option must precede all other options in
10. m If there is a current explicit connection all databases in the DBPATH setting that pertain to the current database server appear 4 6 DB Access User Manual The SELECT DATABASE Screen You can select a database in either of the following ways m Type the database name and press RETURN a With an INFORMIX SE database you can include a pathname preceding this name a With INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server you can specify a database server name when you enter the database name m Use the Arrow keys to highlight the name of a database and then press RETURN For example to select the stores7 database type stores7 or highlight stores7 dbserverl and press RETURN The name stores7 dbserver1 appears on the fourth line of the screen If you enter the name of a nonexistent database or a database that DB Access cannot locate DB Access displays an error message If you select a database when another database is already open DB Access closes that database before making your selection the current database You can also issue the DATABASE statement to select a database or the CONNECT statement to connect to a database environment For details see Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option and the discussion of the DATABASE and CONNECT statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax If you prefer you can use the Connection option on the main menu to connect to a database server and select a database See Cha
11. S displays information about the current session on the main menu t goes directly to the TABLE menu database specifies the name of the current database If you do not include a database name before a q or t menu option you must choose a current database from the SELECT DATABASE screen Then the requested menu appears Working with DB Access 1 15 Going to a Submenu and Submenu Option Going to a Submenu and Submenu Option For the c d q and t options you can follow the menu option with another letter For certain menu options you can include an additional letter to go to the next level of menu option This lets you not only invoke DB Access and select an option from the main menu but also go to a screen or menu from the specified submenu dbaccess database ne d opt database ya Noes Svs Ss c opt c goes to the CONNECTION menu d goes to the DATABASE menu q goes to the SQL query language menu t goes to the TABLE menu filename specifies the name of a command file database specifies the name of a database opt selects an option or an option and suboption on the specified menu table specifies a table in the database DB Access accepts the following command line options listed alphabetically CONNECTION Menu Options cc chooses the Connect option on the CONNECTION menu cd chooses the Disconnect option on the CONNECTION menu 1 16 DB Access User Manual G
12. c_state sql The following command file creates the state table CREATE TABLE state code CHAR 2 sname CHAR 15 PRIMARY KEY code 15 c_stock sql The following command file creates the stock table CREATE TABLE stock stock_num SMALLINT manu_code CHAR 3 description CHAR 15 unit_price MONEY 6 unit CHAR 4 unit_descr CHAR 15 PRIMARY KEY stock_num manu_code FOREIGN KEY manu_code REFERENCES manufact A 6 DB Access User Manual c_stores sql c_stores sql The following command file creates the stores7 database CREATE DATABASE stores7 c_table sql The following command file creates a database named restock and then creates a custom table named sports in that database This is available only with INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server CREATE DATABASE restock CREATE TABLE sports catalog_no SERIAL UNIQUE stock_no SMALLINT mfg_code CHAR 5 mfg_name CHAR 20 phone CHAR 18 descript VARCHAR 255 Jis c_trig sql The following command file creates a table named log_record and then creates a trigger named upqty_i which updates it CREATE TABLE log_record item_num SMALLINT ord_num INTEGER username CHARACTER 8 update_time DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE old_qty SMALLINT new_qty SMALLINT CREATE TRIGGER upqty_i UPDATE OF quantity ON items REFERENCING OLD AS pre_upd EW AS post_upd FOR EACH ROWC INSERT INTO log_record VALUES pre_upd item_num pre_upd order_num
13. DB Access Database Utility User Manual Version 7 2 April 1996 Part No 000 7894A DB Access User Manual Published by INFORMIX Press Informix Software Inc 4100 Bohannon Drive Menlo Park CA 94025 The following are worldwide trademarks of Informix Software Inc or its subsidiaries registered in the United States of America as indicated by and in numerous other countries worldwide INFORMIX C ISAM INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server The following are worldwide trademarks of the indicated owners or their subsidiaries registered in the United States of America as indicated by and in numerous other countries worldwide Adobe Systems Incorporated PostScript International Business Machines Corporation IBM X OpenCompany Ltd UNIX X Open Some of the products or services mentioned in this document are provided by companies other than Informix These products or services are identified by the trademark or servicemark of the appropriate company If you have a question about one of those products or services please call the company in question directly Documentation Team Signe Haugen Susan Koehler Eileen Wollam Copyright 1981 1996 by Informix Software Inc All rights reserved No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage
14. Type the name of the command file you want to drop or highlight it with the Arrow keys and press RETURN DB Access displays a special screen header that asks for confirmation before it drops the command file as shown in Figure 3 35 conrrRM Na Y Figure 3 35 o es No I do ES want to drop it The DROP COMMAND FILE AIN confirmation screen c_state sel_ojoinl c_calls c_stock d_view sel_ojoin2 c_cat c_stores del_stock sel_ojoin3 c_custom c_table ins_table sel_ojoin4 c_index c_trig opt_disk sel_order c_items c_type sel_agg sel_sub c_manuf c_viewl sel_all sel_union c_orders c_view2 sel_group upd_table c_proc d_proc sel_join The default is No to help prevent you from deleting a command file by mistake To drop the highlighted command file press the Y key or use the right Arrow key to highlight Yes and press RETURN DB Access drops the command file and returns you to the SQL menu To leave the DROP COMMAND FILE screen without dropping a command file press the N key RETURN or the Interrupt key You then return to the SQL menu 3 32 DB Access User Manual The Database Menu Option Choosing the Database Option Selecting a Database The SELECT DATABASE Soren Differences Between OnLine and SE Exiting the Screen Creating a Database E Differences Between OnLine and SE maa The OnLine CREATE DATABASE Menu Specifying a Dbspace Specifying Logging on OnLine Exiting the OnLine CREATE DATABASE M
15. main menu 1 29 modifying a table 2 29 SQL menu 3 4 TABLE menu 5 6 Menus ACTIVATE MODE ANSI for SE 4 14 ADD CHECK VALUE 5 41 ADD DEFAULT TYPE 5 46 ADD DEFAULT VALUE 5 47 CHECK CONSTRAINTS 5 40 CONNECTION 2 18 6 4 CONSTRAINTS 3 24 5 34 5 88 CREATE DATABASE for OnLine 4 12 CREATE DATABASE for SE 4 13 DEFAULTS 5 45 ENABLE CASCADING DELETES 5 38 example 1 33 for DATABASE menu 4 3 to 4 21 for SQL menu 3 3 to 3 32 for TABLE menu 5 5 to 5 95 getting help 1 33 how to exit 1 33 how to select an option 1 33 how to use 1 32 in local language 1 10 INFO 5 84 INFO FOR TRIGGER 3 28 LOCK MODE 5 32 main with session information for no server 6 11 REFERENCE 3 25 5 88 REMOVE 5 27 5 61 SELECT BLOBSPACE 5 15 structure in DB Access 1 30 structure of header 1 32 TABLE OPTIONS 5 29 TRANSACTION 4 22 6 8 UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS 5 43 using Help 1 35 Messages in local language 1 10 Mistakes correcting with the schema editor 2 25 Mode ANSI compliant and START DATABASE 2 41 insert 1 37 locking 5 32 typeover 1 37 MODIFY LENGTH screen 5 24 MODIFY NAME screen 5 22 MODIFY NULLS screen 5 26 Modify option ALTER TABLE menu 5 56 CREATE TABLE menu 5 9 5 10 SQL menu 3 9 MODIFY TYPE screen 5 23 Modifying a column with the ALTER TABLE menu 5 59 Modifying a table adding a column with the schema editor 2 30 changing a column 5 21 changing a column with the schema editor 2 31 changing fragmentation strategy 2 34 changi
16. shown on ALTER FRAGMENT menu 5 67 5 74 shown on EXPRESSION menu 5 53 shown on ROUND_ROBIN menu 5 50 specifying for table storage 5 30 storing a database 4 12 Dbspace option TABLE OPTIONS menu 5 29 5 62 DECIMAL data type 5 14 Default column type current 5 46 column type dbservername 5 46 column type literal 5 46 column type null 5 46 column type sitename 5 46 column type today 5 46 column type user 5 46 column values adding 5 46 column values data validation 5 48 column values defining 5 45 column values displaying 3 19 3 25 column values dropping 5 47 column values modifying 5 47 column values paging through 5 47 column ADD DEFAULT TYPE menu 5 46 column ADD DEFAULT VALUE menu 5 47 column adding 5 46 column adding or modifying with an editor 5 47 column data validation 5 48 column displaying 5 91 column dropping 5 47 column modifying 5 47 column paging through 5 47 database server connecting to 2 42 database server selecting 6 6 database server specifying 1 6 dbspace for OnLine database data 4 12 defining values for columns 5 45 dropping a check constraint 5 42 dropping a foreign key 5 39 editor specifying 3 10 extent sizes for OnLine 5 31 for ACTIVATE LOGGING screen on SE 4 14 for ACTIVATE MODE ANSI screen on SE 4 15 for ADD DUPLICATES screen 5 17 for ADD INDEX screen 5 17 for ADD NAME screen 5 11 for ADD NULLS screen 5 19 for CREATE DATABASE confirmation screen 4 15
17. 3 23 3 24 3 24 3 28 3 29 3 30 3 30 4 9 4 10 4 12 4 13 4 15 4 17 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 19 4 20 4 20 4 21 4 21 4 21 Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option Selecting the TABLE Menu Creating a Table The CREATE TABLE Sereen Naming the Table Building the Table Schema Differences Between OnLine and SE Exiting the CREATE TABLE Menu Adding a Column to a Table Adding to the Table Schema Building the Table Schema Modifying a Column in a Table Dropping a Column Pi Rebuilding the Table Schema Displaying Subsequent Table Screens Setting Table Options on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Specifying Table Storage on INFORMIX SE Defining Constraints Ve 2 Defining a Fragmentation Strategy Altering a Table The ALTER TABLE Screen f Differences Between OnLine and SE Exiting the ALTER TABLE Screen Adding a Column with the ALTER TABLE Men Modifying a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu Dropping a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu Using the Screen Option on the ALTER TABLE Menu Changing Table Options with the ALTER TABLE Menu Altering the Fragmentation Strategy of a Table Altering or Defining a Fragmentation Strategy E The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Round robin Strategy n The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu No Fragmentation Displaying Table Information The Columns Option The Indexes Option The Privileges Option The References Option The Stat
18. Compliance with Industry Standards To learn more about the SQL language consider the following books m A Guide to the SQL Standard by C J Date with H Darwen Addison Wesley Publishing 1993 m Understanding the New SQL A Complete Guide by J Melton and A Simon Morgan Kaufmann Publishers 1993 m Using SQL by J Groff and P Weinberg Osborne McGraw Hill 1990 The DB Access User Manual assumes that you are familiar with your computer operating system If you have limited UNIX system experience consult your operating system manual or a good introductory text before you read this manual The following texts provide a good introduction to UNIX systems m Introducing the UNIX System by H McGilton and R Morgan McGraw Hill Book Company 1983 m Learning the UNIX Operating System by G Todino J Strang and J Peek O Reilly Associates 1993 m A Practical Guide to the UNIX System by M Sobell Benjamin Cummings Publishing 1989 m UNIX System V A Practical Guide by M Sobell Benjamin Cummings Publishing 1995 Compliance with Industry Standards The American National Standards Institute ANSI has established a set of industry standards for SOL Informix SQL based products are fully compliant with SQL 92 Entry Level published as ANSI X3 135 1992 which is identical to ISO 9075 1992 on INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server In addition many features of OnLine comply with the SQL 92 Intermediate and Full Level and X O
19. SQL Issue the CLOSE DATABASE statement to close the current database You must run the CLOSE DATABASE statement before you can drop the current database with the DROP DATABASE statement You also can use the DISCONNECT statement to disconnect from a database server and close the current database If your database has transactions and you have started a transaction you must issue the COMMIT WORK or ROLLBACK WORK statement before you issue the CLOSE DATABASE or DISCONNECT statement The following example closes the current database CLOSE DATABASE The following example disconnects from the starfish database server and closes the current database DISCONNECT current See the complete syntax and usage for the CLOSE DATABASE and DISCONNECT statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Creating Databases and Tables 2 51 The Query language Menu Option Choosing the Query language Option Entering a New SQL Statement Running an SQL Statement Running Error Free Statements What Happens When There Are Errors Viewing the Next Page of Data Modifying an SQL Statement Editing an SQL Statement Redirecting Query Results Sending Output to a Printer Sending Output to a File The New file Option The Append file Option Sending Output to a Pipe Choosing an Existing SOL Statement Sample SQL Command Files Saving the Current SQL Statement Displaying Table Information The Columns Option The Indexe
20. The Table Menu Option 5 73 The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy The SELECT DBSPACE Menu The SELECT DBSPACE menu shown in Figure 5 64 appears when you select the Add or Modify option from the ALTER FRAGMENT expression strategy menu SELECT DBSPACE gt gt Figure 5 64 Select a dbspace with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT DBSPACE menu for Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help expression strategy when altering a table dbspace2 dbspace3 The SELECT DBSPACE menu displays all the dbspaces associated with the current OnLine database server and prompts you to select the one you want for your expression fragmentation strategy The default or current selection is highlighted m Use the Add option to insert a new line before the current line and make the Dbspace Name field current You can select from a list of dbspaces on the current OnLine database server when the current field is Dbspace Name m Use the Modify option to modify the current field You can select from a list of dbspaces on the current OnLine database server The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu When you select the Init option from the ALTER FRAGMENT expression strategy menu the following ALTER FRAGMENT menu appears as shown in Figure 5 65 Figure 5 65 ALTER FRAGMENT INIT new_acct eXpression Dbspace rOwids Exit The ALTER Select and define a round robin fragmentation strategy FRAGMENT menu Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for
21. USER CURRENT pre_upd quantity post_upd quantity Sample Command Files A 7 c_type sql c_type sql The following command file creates the call_type table CREATE TABLE call_type call_code CHAR 1 code_descr CHAR 30 PRIMARY KEY call_code JS c_view1 sql The following command file creates a view called custview on a single table and grants privileges on the view to public It includes the WITH CHECK OPTION keywords to verify that any changes made to underlying tables through the view do not violate the definition of the view CREATE VIEW custview firstname lastname company city AS SELECT fname lname company city FROM customer WHERE city Redwood City WITH CHECK OPTION GRANT DELETE INSERT SELECT UPDATE ON custview TO public c_view2 sql The following command file creates a view on the orders and items tables CREATE VIEW someorders custnum ocustnum newprice AS SELECT orders order_num items order_num items total_price 1 5 FROM orders items WHERE orders order_num items order_num AND items total_price gt 100 00 d_proc sql The following command file drops the stored procedure that was created by the c_proc sql command file DROP PROCEDURE read_address A 8 DB Access User Manual d_trig sql d_trig sql The following command file drops the trigger that was created by the c_trig sql command file DROP TRIGGER upqty_i d_view sql The following comma
22. You cannot modify a column in a table to disallow nulls if any existing rows in the table have null values 5 26 DB Access User Manual Dropping a Column Dropping a Column Delete a column from a table schema by performing the following steps 1 Position the highlight anywhere on the column that you want to drop 2 Select the Drop option on the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE menu Some or all of that column line is then highlighted on the screen DB Access displays the REMOVE screen shown in Figure 5 19 and you can verify your decision Figure 5 19 REMOVE clients Yes No Deletes the highlighted column from the table The REMOVE screen Page 1 of 1 mydata mydbserv Press CONTROL W for Help Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial 101 Unique No fname Char Yes 1name Char Yes company Char The REMOVE screen displays the following options Yes deletes the line currently highlighted in the schema editor No does not delete the line currently highlighted in the schema editor The default is Yes If you decide that you do not want to drop the highlighted column press the N key or use the right Arrow key to highlight No and press RETURN DB Access drops the column and all its data if you specify Yes and select the Build new table option from the EXIT menu DB Access returns you to the TABLE menu The Table Menu Option 5 27 Rebuilding the Table Schema Rebuilding the Table Schema
23. and creating databases or Chapter 1 Working with DB Access for infor mation on selecting a database from the command line when you invoke DB Access See Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options for information about connecting to an existing database and database server Entering a New SQL Statement When you are ready to enter an SQL statement select the New option on the SQL menu The NEW screen appears and indicates that you are using the SOL editor as shown in Figure 3 2 D diti CTRL A T yT t CTRL R Red Figure 3 2 one editing ypeover Inser R Redraw Delete character CTRL D Delete rest of line The NEW screen for entering new SQL statements When the NEW screen appears you can type an SQL statement using the SQL editor The editor lets you enter statements and edit them before you run them You can use almost any format when you enter an SQL statement You can string several SQL statements together by using a semicolon to separate them See Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for rules regarding syntax and usage of SOL statements Generally if you make a mistake while typing a new SQL statement you can move the cursor with the Arrow keys and reenter parts of the statement You can also use the editing keys to change between insert and typeover mode redraw the screen delete a character and delete the rest of a line The uses of the editing keys which are listed at the top of the screen
24. and retrieval systems without permission of the publisher To the extent that this software allows the user to store display and otherwise manipulate various forms of data including without limitation multimedia content such as photographs movies music and other binary large objects blobs use of any single blob may potentially infringe upon numerous different third party intellectual and or proprietary rights It is the user s responsibility to avoid infringements of any such third party rights RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Software and accompanying materials acquired with United States Federal Government funds or intended for use within or for any United States federal agency are provided with Restricted Rights as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 c 1 ii or FAR 52 227 19 Chapter 1 Table of Contents Introduction About This Manual Organization of This Manual Types of Users Software Dependencies Demonstration Database New Features of This Product Conventions Typographical Conventions Icon Conventions 3 Command Line Conventions Sample Code Conventions Additional Documentation Printed Documentation On Line Documentation Related Reading ry Compliance with Industry Bbndards Informix Welcomes Your Comments Working with DB Access What Is DB Access Differences Between OnLine and SE Preparing to Use DB Access Setting Standard Environment Variables Setting Environment Variables
25. c_custom sql creates the customer table c_index sql creates an index on the zipcode column of the customer table c_items sql creates the items table c_manuf sql creates the manufact table c_orders sql creates the orders table c_proc sql creates a stored procedure c_state sql creates the state table c_stock sql creates the stock table 3 16 DB Access User Manual c_stores sql c_table sql c_trig sql c_type sql c_view1 sql c_view2 sql d_proc sql d_trig sql d_view sql del_stock sql ins_table sql opt_disk sql sel_agg sql sel_all sql sel_group sql sel_join sql sel_ojoin1 sql sel_ojoin2 sql sel_ojoin3 sql sel_ojoin4 sql sel_order sql sel_sub sql sel_union sql upd_table sql Sample SQL Command Files creates the stores7 database creates a new database and a custom table named sports creates a table and a trigger that updates it creates the call_type table creates a single table view creates a multiple table view drops a stored procedure drops a trigger drops a view deletes rows from the stock table for cascading deletes OnLine only inserts a row into the sports table provides an example of a SELECT statement with an optical disc subsystem INFORMIX OnLine Optical only queries on table data sample SELECT with aggregate function queries on table data contains all seven SELECT statement clauses queries on table data sample SELECT statement with GROUP BY and HAVING
26. dropping 5 44 information on 3 27 5 91 modifying 5 44 paging through 5 44 UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS menu 5 43 UNIX case sensitivity and filenames 3 18 PATH environment variable 1 6 system editors 1 39 TERM environment variable 1 6 TERMCAP environment variable 1 6 TERMINFO environment variable 1 6 Use editor option ADD CHECK VALUE menu 5 41 ADD DEFAULT VALUE menu 5 47 SQL menu 3 10 USER clause of CONNECT statement in DB Access command file 1 28 in DB Access interactive mode 1 27 in DB Access shell file 1 28 User name in command or shell file 1 28 in CONNECT statement 1 28 prompt on DB Access USER NAME screen 6 5 V Values displaying default for table 3 28 VARCHAR data type 5 14 Variables setting environment at system prompt or in a file 1 7 1 9 setting for DB Access environment 1 6 Version number displaying from the command line 1 24 W Warning messages in local language 1 10
27. for DISCONNECT confirmation screen 6 8 for DROP COMMAND FILE confirmation screen 3 32 for DROP DATABASE confirmation screen 2 37 for DROP TABLE confirmation screen 5 95 for ENABLE CASCADING DELETES menu 5 38 for exiting CREATE DATABASE menu 4 13 4 15 for exiting the schema 5 20 5 22 for LOCK MODE menu 5 33 for LOG menu on OnLine 4 13 for REMOVE menu 5 27 5 61 initial extent size 5 31 length and scale for number type 5 16 length for CHAR data type 5 16 length for MONEY data type 5 16 length for NCHAR data type 5 16 literal type values for 3 28 next extent size 5 32 number for SERIAL data type 5 16 operating system editor 1 39 printer sending output to 3 12 starting number for serial value 2 23 table storage location for OnLine 5 30 text editor 1 39 values for column constraints 2 33 values displaying for table 3 28 DEFAULTS menu 5 45 DELETE key 1 11 Deletes enabling cascading 5 38 DELIMIDENT environment variable 1 7 Demonstration database SQL command files 3 16 A 1 Differences between ALTER TABLE menu and CREATE TABLE menu 5 56 between OnLine and SE on the ALTER TABLE menu 5 57 Index 5 between OnLine and SE on the CREATE DATABASE screen 4 10 between OnLine and SE on the CREATE TABLE menu 5 9 between OnLine and SE on the SELECT DATABASE screen 4 8 between using DB Access on OnLine and SE 1 4 Directory unique database names within 4 10 dbs extension for database 2 19 2 29 Disconnecting from a da
28. selecting from CONNECTION menu 6 6 SELECT DBSPACE screen 5 30 Selecting a database differences between OnLine and SE 4 8 from a menu 4 6 three ways to do it 2 7 Index 11 Selecting a database server from a menu 6 4 SELECT DATABASE SERVER screen 6 4 SERIAL data type assigning starting number 2 22 described 5 14 Server connecting to 6 4 disconnecting from 6 8 displaying session information on 6 10 SELECT DATABASE SERVER screen 6 4 selecting from a menu 6 4 Session information displaying 1 23 6 10 Setting environment variables for DB Access 1 6 Shell Bourne 1 7 1 9 1 26 C 1 7 1 9 1 26 executing commands from standard input 1 27 Korn 1 7 1 9 1 26 searching directory for executables 1 6 setting environment variables in 1 7 1 9 Shell commands executing from standard input 1 27 Shell file using to connect to database server 1 28 Size setting initial extent 5 31 setting next extent 5 31 SMALLFLOAT data type 5 14 SMALLINT data type 5 14 Space reserving on disk for OnLine table 5 31 specifying next extent size for OnLine table 5 32 SPACEBAR key 1 12 SQL command files for stores7 database 3 16 entering statements 3 5 12 DB Access User Manual how to read syntax in on line Help screens B 1 using from a menu 3 3 SQL editor check constraint values 5 41 column default types 5 46 column default values 5 47 CTRL A editing key 1 37 CTRL D editing key 1 37 CTRL R editing key 1 37 CTRL X editing key 1
29. 2 product manual contains a list of new features for that product The Introduction to each manual in the Version 7 2 Informix Guide to SQL series contains a list of new SQL features A comprehensive list of all of the new features for Version 7 2 Informix products is in the Release Notes file called SERVERS_7 2 Version 7 2 of DB Access supports the USER clause of the CONNECT statement through the CONNECTION and SQL menus and in interactive non menu mode This new feature lets you specify a user ID or a user ID and password before connecting to a database environment New screens are shown in this manual the CONNECT statement is described in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Conventions This section describes the conventions that are used in this manual By becoming familiar with these conventions you will find it easier to gather information from this and other volumes in the documentation set The following conventions are covered Typographical conventions Icon conventions Command line conventions Sample code conventions Introduction 9 Typographical Conventions Convention Typographical Conventions This manual uses a standard set of conventions to introduce new terms illustrate screen displays describe command syntax and so forth The following typographical conventions are used throughout this manual Meaning italics Within text new terms and emphasized words are printed in italics Within syntax
30. 29 Setting Table Options on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Specifying a Storage Location Select the Storage option on the TABLE_OPTIONS menu and the STORAGE menu appears Figure 5 22 STORAGE new_acet Fragment Exit The STORAGE menu Select a dbspace in which to store the table for storing table Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help data and defining fragmentation strategy The STORAGE menu has the following options Dbspace displays a list of available dbspaces for storing the table and prompts for a selection Fragment allows you to define a fragmentation strategy for the table you created See the discussion of Defining a Fragmentation Strategy on page 5 49 Exit exits the STORAGE menu and returns you to the TABLE_OPTIONS menu Select the Dbspace option and the SELECT DBSPACE menu appears as shown in Figure 5 23 Dbspaces are listed alphabetically and the default rootdbs or current selection is highlighted SELECT DBSPACE gt gt Figure 5 23 Select a dbspace with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT DBSPACE menu for Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help specifying table storage pers_dbs empl_dbs Select an available dbspace from the list in which to store database data The default is rootdbs or a dbspace that you create as the default You then return to the TABLE_OPTIONS menu 5 30 DB Access User Manual Extent Size gt gt Setting Table Option
31. 37 editing keys 1 37 editing restrictions 1 38 ESC key 1 37 how to use 1 37 modifying SQL statements 3 9 new SQL statements 3 5 SQL menu available options 3 4 Choose option 3 15 CHOOSE screen 3 15 DROP COMMAND FILE screen 3 31 Drop option 3 31 INFO FOR TABLE screen 3 19 Info option 3 19 Modify option 3 9 New option 3 5 NEW screen 3 5 OUTPUT menu 3 12 Output option 3 12 Run option 3 6 running new SQL statements 3 6 Save option 3 18 SAVE screen 3 18 selecting from the command line 1 15 selecting options from the command line 1 17 statements you can run 2 13 the INFO FOR TABLE screen 3 29 Use editor option 3 10 SQL statements ALTER FRAGMENT 2 48 ALTER TABLE 2 45 2 48 appending query results to an existing file 3 13 choosing a command file 3 15 CLOSE DATABASE 2 51 CONNECT TO 2 42 CREATE DATABASE 2 41 CREATE INDEX 2 44 CREATE TABLE 2 43 creating a database 2 41 creating an index on a table 2 44 current defined 2 12 DISCONNECT 2 51 DROP DATABASE 2 50 DROP TABLE 2 50 dropping 3 30 dropping a column 2 46 editing with the SQL editor 1 36 editing with the system editor 1 39 3 10 entering new ones with the SQL editor 3 5 executing from standard input 1 27 INFO 2 48 interactive input on terminal 1 26 listed for DB Access 2 13 modifying 3 9 modifying a table 2 44 reading from standard input 1 25 redirecting query results 3 12 RENAME COLUMN 2 47 renaming a column 2 47 running 3 6 sav
32. 5 10 ADD FILL FACTOR PERCENTAGE 0 Figure 5 10 gt gt Enter the fill factor percentage RETURN adds it The ADD FILL FACTOR Page 1 of 1 personnel Press CTRL W for Help PERCENTAGE Column Name Type Length Index Nulls screen with fill factor emp1_num Integer U 70 No last_name Char D 90 No insurance Integer Dups Yes ss_num Integer Unique No The Table Menu Option 5 17 Adding a Column to a Table Use the ADD FILL FACTOR PERCENTAGE screen to set the fill factor percent when creating an index on a single column This value can be set only when creating an index and only on OnLine You can modify the fill factor through the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE menu but you cannot alter it through the ALTER TABLE menu after the table for the index has been created m If you enter a value less than 1 or greater than 100 you get an error m If you press RETURN without entering a value the fill factor syntax will not be included in the CREATE INDEX syntax that goes to the database server The fillfactor parameter in the OnLine onconfig file is used if none is specified in onconfig the default fill factor value is 90 percent When you specify a fill factor the percent appears in the Index column and the words Unique and Dups are abbreviated to U and D respectively The highlight then moves to the next field The ADD INDEX menu option creates a nonclustered ascending index for the values in the associated datab
33. Display of ae references col2 f Z information col3 All None This display indicates the following table level references privileges m The user betty can reference columns col1 col2 and col3 of the specified table m The user wilma can reference all the columns in the table m The user public cannot access any columns in the table The Status Option Figure 5 84 shows the kind of status information you see when you select the Status option for the cust_calls table on an INFORMIX SE database server Figure 5 84 cust_calls velma Display of status 517 information 7 s 7 01 28 1994 With INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server the Audit Trail File line does not appear The Table Menu Option 5 87 The cOnstraints Option The cOnstraints Option When you select the cOnstraints option from the INFO menu the CONSTRAINTS menu appears as shown in Figure 5 85 Figure 5 85 CONSTRAINTS mytab 0 Reference Primary Check Unique Defaults Exit The CONSTRAINTS Referenced and referencing options menu You can select from the following options on the CONSTRAINTS menu Reference shows information on referential foreign key constraints associated with the specified table Primary shows primary key constraints placed on columns in the specified table Check show information on check constraints on columns in the specified table Unique shows information on unique constraints on columns in the specified table Defa
34. For messages and menus in a non English language you have properly installed one or more Language Supplements 1 10 DB Access User Manual How to Use Your Terminal How to Use Your Terminal Your terminal keyboard has some special keys that you use to give instructions to DB Access Before you begin using DB Access locate the following keys Arrows BACKSPACE CONTROL DELETE ESCAPE The Arrow keys are usually found at the lower right of your keyboard The up Arrow T key moves the cursor up one line If your terminal does not have a key type CTRL K The down Arrow J key moves the cursor down one line If your terminal does not have a J key type CTRL J The left Arrow key moves the cursor back one position on the screen If your terminal does not have a lt key type CTRL H The right Arrow gt key moves the cursor forward one position on the screen If your terminal does not have a gt key use the CTRL L key The BACKSPACE key might be marked with a left Arrow It is usually located at the top right of the keyboard The CONTROL key is often labeled CTRL or CNTRL and is usually located at the left of the keyboard This manual refers to the CONTROL key as CTRL On some systems type CTRL C to cancel or abort a program or to leave a current menu and return to the menu one level above This manual refers to CTRL C as the Interrupt key The DELETE key is sometimes labeled RUBO
35. Help for defining expression fragmentation strategy 5 74 DB Access User Manual The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy The ALTER FRAGMENT menu has the following options Round_robin selects and defines a round robin strategy for fragmentation eXpression selects and defines an expression strategy for fragmentation Dbspace selects the dbspace into which you want to move all the records from the current table strategy rOwids adds a rowid column to the table being initialized The ADD ROWIDS menu appears Exit exits the FRAGMENT menu and returns you to the ALTER FRAGMENT menu m Use the Dbspace option to move all fragments from the current strat egy into one dbspace resulting in a table that is no longer fragmented m Use the rOwids option to add rowids to the current table Rowid usage and access are outlined in the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide Informix Guide to SQL Reference and Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial The ADD ROWIDS Menu Select the rOwids option from the FRAGMENT menu The ADD ROWIDS menu appears as shown in Figure 5 66 Figure 5 66 ADD ROWIDS No The ADD ROWIDS Enable rowids for the table menu for expression strategy The ADD ROWIDS menu displays the following options which let you indicate whether you want rowids added to the table that is being initialized Yes enables rowids for the current table No does not enable rowids for the current table
36. Menu How to Select a Database Menu Leaving the Menu Where System Information Is Stored How To Create a Table in the Database toes i Calling Up the Table Schema Naming the New Table Building the Table Schema Naming the Columns Defining the Data Type of a Column 2 9 2 10 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 15 2 15 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 19 2 20 2 20 2 21 2 21 2 22 Indexing a Column a 2 a 1 ew 223 Allowing Null Values 2 2 2 1 2 wee a 2 24 Defining the Next Column a 1 2 we ww ee we 2 25 Correcting Mistakes in the Schema 2 2 2 25 Exiting the Schema Editor 2 1 1 1 2 26 Specifying Column Constraints 2 2 1 1 2 27 Creating a Fragmented Table 2 2 1 ww ww 2 28 Where Table Information Is Stored 2 2 1 2 2 29 How To Modify a Table in the Database UR bE th Tatton ae oh 2g Using the Alter Option 2 toe Be 290 AddingaColumntoaTable 2 30 Modifying a Column in a Table 2 31 Dropping a Column from a Table 2 32 Modifying or Dropping a Column Constraint 2 33 Altering a Fragmentation Strategy 2 34 How To Get Table Information Menu 235 How to Drop a Table Menu ee 285 How to Drop a Database Menu 2 a ee 2 37 How to Close a Database Menu
37. Name screen for managing Press CTRL W for Help disk space Type Length Index Nulls At this screen you can perform either of the following actions m Press RETURN to specify the default extent size of eight 1 kilobyte blocks m Enter an initial extent size in kilobytes at the prompt and press RETURN The minimum initial extent size is four 1 kilobyte blocks For more information on calculating table and extent sizes see Chapter 3 of the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide The Table Menu Option 5 31 Setting Table Options on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Setting the Next Extent Size When you select the Next_size option from the TABLE_OPTIONS menu DB Access displays the Next Size screen as shown in Figure 5 25 Figure 5 25 Next Size gt RA The Next Size screen Specify next extent size in kilobytes f disk or managing Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help space Column Name Type Length Index Nulls SS This screen lets you specify the size for the next extent and subsequent extents to be allocated when the previous extent is full You can perform either of the following actions m Press RETURN to specify the default next extent size of eight 1 kilobyte blocks m Enter the next extent size in kilobytes at the prompt and press RETURN The minimum next extent size is four 1 kilobyte blocks For more information on calculating table and extent sizes se
38. RETURN or the R key and DB Access performs one of the following actions m Runs the statement m Displays an error message on the screen indicating a syntax or other error 3 6 DB Access User Manual Running Error Free Statements When you select the Run option DB Access first checks each statement to ensure that it conforms to the SOL syntax and usage rules If your statements contain no mistakes DB Access processes them Running Error Free Statements If a statement runs correctly DB Access displays the requested results for a SELECT statement or displays a message at the bottom of the screen indicating that the action you requested has been completed For the statement shown in Figure 3 3 you would see the following message Table created What Happens When There Are Errors If an error occurs the Modify option on the SQL menu is highlighted You can press RETURN to choose this option or select the Use editor option to correct the statement and try to run it again If you make any syntax or typing mistakes in an SQL statement DB Access does not process the statement Instead it continues to display the text of the statement along with a message describing the error For example if there is a syntax error you see the following message at the bottom of the screen 201 A syntax error has occurred If there is an execution or run time error DB Access continues to process the statement and also returns an error
39. Results Redirecting Query Results The output from an SQL statement such as SELECT normally appears on the screen The Output option on the SQL menu lets you send query results to the printer store them in a system file or pipe them to a program You can use the SQL statement OUTPUT for the same purpose It is described in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Select the Output option from the SQL menu The OUTPUT menu appears as shown in Figure 3 7 Send query results to a printer Figure 3 7 New file Append file To pipe Exit The OUTPUT menu for redirecting query stores7 dbserverl results SELECT FROM customer Before you can send query results to a printer file or pipe you must have the SELECT statement on the screen as the current statement Write a new statement modify or edit an existing one or choose a command file as discussed in Choosing an Existing SQL Statement on page 3 15 and return to the SOL menu Select an option on the OUTPUT menu and the current query is printed stored or piped to a program just as it would appear if it were on the screen If you want to return to the SQL menu without redirecting query results from an OUTPUT screen press the Interrupt key Sending Output to a Printer If you want to send your query results directly to a printer select the Printer option from the OUTPUT menu DB Access sends the results to your default printer and displays a messag
40. The following command file provides an example of a SELECT statement on an optical disc subsystem It includes the read only family and volume operators that support optical storage This is available only with the INFORMIX OnLine Optical database server The query generates a list of the volumes that contain pictures of bicycle helmets One row of output family volume is generated for each data row that contains a picture of a bicycle helmet The family operator returns the name of the optical family where an optical blob column is stored and volume returns the number of the volume where an optical blob column is stored These functions are valid only for data stored on optical media SELECT family cat_picture volume cat_picture FROM catalog WHERE stock_num 110 sel_agg sql The SELECT statement in the following command file queries on table data using aggregate functions It combines the aggregate functions MAX and MIN in a single statement SELECT MAX ship_charge MIN ship_charge FROM orders A 10 DB Access User Manual sel_all sql sel_all sql The following example command file contains all seven SELECT statement clauses that you can use in the Informix implementation of interactive SQL This SELECT statement joins the orders and items tables It also uses display labels table aliases and integers as column indicators groups and orders the data and puts the results into a temporary table SELECT
41. When you complete your column modifications you must build the final table Select the Exit option from the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE menu and DB Access displays the EXIT menu as shown in Figure 5 20 Figure 5 20 EXIT clients Build new table Discard new table The EXIT d Builds a new table and returns to the Table Menu e menu use to build or rebuild a Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help table Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial Unique No fname Char Yes 1name Char Yes company Char Yes address1l Char Yes address2 Char Yes city Char Yes state Char Yes zipcode Char Yes phone Char Yes AS The EXIT menu lists the following options Build new builds the table with the modified column definitions table Discard new discards the modified table instructions table The default is Build new table Press RETURN to modify the table and you return to the TABLE menu To select the Discard new table option press the D key or use an Arrow key and press RETURN You return to the TABLE menu without saving the modified table definition Displaying Subsequent Table Screens Selecting the Screen option on the CREATE TABLE menu displays the next screen of column definitions in the schema editor If you choose Screen at the last screen of definitions DB Access redisplays the first screen of information Tip If the table does not contain more than one screen of columns the Screen option has no
42. a Language Supplement Finding Your Way in DB Access How to Use Your Terminal Invoking DB Access Calling up the DB Access Main Menu Invoking DB Access and Selecting a Database Selecting a Menu Option a Going to a Submenu and Submenu Option Sample DB Access Command Line Commands Executing a Command File Echoing File Input to the Screen Checking for ANSI Compliance Displaying Session Information Displaying the Software Version Number Activating the XLUF Feature for Nonprintable Characters Other Command Line Features DN A Mas 3 Reading from Standard Input A Interactive Input through Standard Input Executing Shell Commands from Standard Input Connecting to a Database Environment in Non Menu Mode a Viewing the XPG4 Information Schema 1 4 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 8 1 10 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 19 1 20 1 20 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 24 1 25 1 25 1 26 1 27 1 27 1 28 The DB Access Main Menu ee 29 The DB Access Menu Structure 2 2 2 1 1 30 Using DB Access Menus and Screens 1 32 Using Menu Screens 2 2 2 2 we ee ee ee 1 32 Selecting an Option 2 2 2 2 2 ee 183 Leaving a Menu Screen 2 2 2 2 2 ee 1 33 Getting Help 2 ew ee ee ee 1 33 Using Text entry Screens 2 2 ww we ew 1 34 Entering Text on the Screen 2 2 2 7 ww 184 Leaving a Text entry Screen 2 1
43. a database and make it the current database The following example creates an ANSI compliant database with logging on an OnLine database server CREATE DATABASE lutefisk WITH LOG MODE ANSI The following example creates an ANSI compliant database with a log file on an INFORMIX SE database server CREATE DATABASE lutefisk WITH LOG IN ole ufda lfile MODE ANSI If you are using the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and you are the OnLine administrator user informix you also can make an OnLine database ANSI compliant and start logging with the Databases option of the LOGICAL LOGS menu in ON Monitor See the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide for details If you are using the INFORMIX SE database server you can use the SQL statement START DATABASE to turn on transaction logging and put a database in ANSI compliant mode or you can turn off transaction logging on a database that is not ANSI compliant You must have DBA privileges for the database and there must be no current database The following example removes logging from a database on INFORMIX SE START DATABASE bacalhau WITH NO LOG The START DATABASE statement gives you exclusive access to the database To make the database available to other authorized users you must issue the CLOSE DATABASE statement or exit DB Access See the complete syntax and usage for the CREATE DATABASE and START DATABASE statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Synta
44. a list of foreign key constraints and prompts you to select one to drop The REMOVE menu appears with a constraint highlighted and the name of the constraint in the menu header The highlighted constraint depends on the location of your cursor on the FOREIGN KEY menu when you selected the Drop option If the current highlighted field is Constraint then the entire constraint is deleted If any other field is highlighted then only that referenced referencing pair is dropped The default is Yes RETURN to drop the highlighted constraint Move the cursor to highlight No if you do not want to drop that constraint You return to the FOREIGN KEY menu The FOREIGN KEY Menu the Screen Option Use the Screen option to page to the next page of referencing referenced constraints listed for the current table The FOREIGN KEY Menu the Exit Option Select the Exit option to return to the CONSTRAINTS menu where you can define modify or drop other constraints The Table Menu Option 5 39 Defining Constraints Working with Check Constraints The CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu lets you add modify or drop a check constraint for the current table Select the Check option on the CONSTRAINTS menu to access the CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu as shown in Figure 5 32 CHECK CONS Ss b dd dif S Figure 5 32 HECK NSTRAINTS mytab A Modi Dro creen Exit Add a check Cee Ob The CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu Constraint Name Value cons2 columnl gt C
45. and CREATE TABLE Differences Between OnLine and SE Figure 5 4 shows how the CREATE TABLE menu looks if you are using INFORMIX SE E li Bad dif s i i Figure ee REATE TABLE clients A Modify Drop creen sTorage Constraints Exit Adds columns to the table above the line with the highlight The CREATE TABLE menu with Page 1 of 1 mydata mydbserv INFORMIX SE Column Name Type Length Index Nulls AAA E The Table Menu Option 5 9 Exiting the CREATE TABLE Menu The CREATE TABLE menu displays the following options with INFORMIX SE Add adds a new column to the table Modify modifies the structure of an existing column Drop drops an existing column from the table Screen scrolls down the screen and displays new text sTorage specifies the full path and filename in which to store a database table Constraints defines and displays primary key foreign key check and unique constraints as well as default values for columns in a table Exit exits the CREATE TABLE menu and returns you to the TABLE menu With INFORMIX SE the CREATE TABLE menu displays the same options that it does with OnLine except for a sTorage option in place of Table_options Exiting the CREATE TABLE Menu To leave the CREATE TABLE menu without creating a table press the Interrupt key and you return to the TABLE menu Adding a Column to a Table To add a new column to a table you must define a new line in the schema edit
46. as shown in Figure 5 14 Figure 5 14 The MODIFY NAME screen RETURN adds it INTERRUPT returns to CREATE ALTER menu Press CTRL W for Help Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial Unique No fname iname company address1l address2 city state zipcode phone Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes 5 22 DB Access User Manual MODIFY TYPE clients Char Number Serial Date Money date Time Interval Permits any combination of letters numbers and symbols Page 1 of 1 Column Name customer_num fname iname company address1 address2 city state zipcode phone Modifying a Column in a Table Type the new name after the prompt at the top of the MODIFY NAME screen and press RETURN You can assign any name as long as you follow the guidelines in Naming the Column on page 5 11 DB Access changes this name under Column Name and redisplays the CREATE TABLE screen so you can make more changes Modifying the Column Data Type Move the highlight to an entry in the Type field for a column and select Modify DB Access displays the MODIFY TYPE menu shown in Figure 5 15 where you can change the data type for that column Figure 5 15 The MODIFY TYPE menu on OnLine Press CTRL W for Help Type Length Index Nulls Serial Unique No Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes T
47. column data is stored in the same tblspace as the other columns If you choose blobspace you can enter the name of any valid blobspace at the prompt BYTE data type stores any kind of binary data in an undifferentiated byte stream You must specify a table and or a blobspace name If you choose Table the column data is stored in the same tblspace as the other columns If you choose blobspace you can enter the name of any valid blobspace at the prompt Database data types are described in detail in Chapter 3 of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference GLS data types are discussed in Chapter 3 of the Guide to GLS Functionality The use of data types in the CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE statements is described in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax When you select TEXT or BYTE from the ADD VARIABLE LENGTH TYPE menu on OnLine the ADD BLOBSPACE TYPE menu appears It lists two options Table and Blobspace Select Table to store the TEXT or BYTE data in a table Select Blobspace to select from a list of available user defined blobspaces on the SELECT BLOBSPACE menu in which to store the TEXT or BYTE data This can be seen in Figure 5 8 SELECT BLOBSPACE gt gt Figure 5 8 Select a blobspace with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT BLOBSPACE menu os perme for storing variable length data Blobspaces are listed alphabetically and the current selection is highlighted For complete information on a
48. constraint information 3 21 5 88 creating an index with an SQL statement 2 44 creating fragmented 2 28 creating through menus 2 10 2 20 5 9 5 62 creating with an SQL statement 2 42 creating with the menu options 2 19 dbspace for storing 5 30 default values for columns 3 28 5 91 defining a column with the schema editor 2 21 5 10 defining the column data types with the schema editor 2 22 displaying information on the screen 3 19 5 83 displaying information with the cOnstraints option 3 24 5 88 displaying information with the Privileges option 3 23 5 86 displaying information with the References option 3 23 5 87 displaying information with the Status option 3 24 5 87 displaying information with the triGgers option 3 28 5 92 displaying References information with the Info option 5 84 dropping 2 50 5 94 dropping a column with the schema editor 2 32 5 27 dropping from a database with the DROP TABLE statement 2 50 dropping using a menu option 2 35 extent sizes for 5 31 foreign key constraint information 3 25 5 88 fragmentation information 3 30 5 93 getting information on extent size 2 49 getting information on lock mode 2 49 getting information on structure and characteristics 2 48 getting information using menu options 2 35 getting information using SQL statements 2 48 how to build a schema 2 11 how to call up the schema 2 20 index information 3 21 3 23 5 86 indexing a colu
49. correcting mistakes in 2 25 how to build 2 11 Information 1 28 rebuilding after changes 5 28 Schema editor ADD STARTING NUMBER screen 2 22 ADD TYPE menu 2 22 adding a column to a table 2 30 ALTER TABLE 2 30 and data types for NLS 1 10 assigning data types 2 22 CHANGE ANYWAY menu 2 31 correcting mistakes 2 25 creating a table 5 6 defining a column 2 21 5 6 definition of 2 21 dropping a column from a table 2 32 5 27 EXIT menu 2 27 5 19 5 28 how to exit 2 26 modifying a column in a table 2 31 using 2 10 what it lets you do 5 7 Screen option ALTER TABLE menu 5 56 5 62 CREATE TABLE menu 5 9 5 10 Screens ADD FILL FACTOR PERCENTAGE 5 17 ADD INDEX 5 17 ADD STORAGE PATHNAME 5 33 CHOOSE 3 15 CREATE DATABASE confirmation 4 13 4 15 DISCONNECT confirmation 2 39 6 8 example 1 34 for DATABASE menu 4 3 to 4 21 for SQL menu 3 3 to 3 32 for TABLE menu 5 5 to 5 95 for text entry 1 34 getting help 1 35 how to enter text 1 34 how to exit 1 35 INFO FOR TABLE 5 83 MODIFY LENGTH 5 24 MODIFY NAME 5 22 MODIFY NULLS 5 26 MODIFY TYPE 5 23 SELECT DATABASE 6 6 SELECT DATABASE SERVER 6 6 SELECT DBSPACE 5 30 SELECT PROCEDURE 4 18 structure of header 1 34 SELECT BLOBSPACE menu 5 15 SELECT DATABASE screen differences between OnLine and SE 4 8 how to exit 4 8 selecting from the CONNECTION menu 6 6 selecting from the DATABASE menu 4 6 two ways to select a database 4 7 SELECT DATABASE SERVER screen
50. diagrams values that you are to specify are printed in italics boldface Identifiers names of classes objects constants events functions program variables forms labels and reports environment variables database names table names column names menu items command names and other similar terms are printed in boldface monospace Information that the product displays and information that you enter are printed in a monospace typeface KEYWORD All keywords appear in uppercase letters 10 DB Access User Manual This symbol indicates the end of product or platform specific information Tip When you are instructed to enter characters or to execute a command immediately press RETURN after the entry When you are instructed to type the text or to press other keys no RETURN is required Icon Conventions Throughout the documentation you will find text that is identified by several different types of icons This section describes these icons Command Line Conventions Comment Icons Comment icons identify three types of information as described in the following table This information is always displayed in italics Icon Description Identifies paragraphs that contain vital instructions cautions or critical information Identifies paragraphs that contain significant information about the feature or operation that is being described Identifies paragra
51. drop the current check constraint The REMOVE menu appears with a constraint highlighted and with the name of the constraint in the menu header The default is Yes Press RETURN to drop the highlighted constraint Move the cursor to highlight No and then press RETURN if you do not want to drop that constraint You return to the CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu The CHECK CONSTRAINTS Menu the Screen Option Use the Screen option to go to the next page of check constraints listed for the current table The CHECK CONSTRAINTS Menu the Exit Option Select the Exit option to return to the CONSTRAINTS menu and you can define or work with other kinds of constraints Data Validation DB Access validates the check value when you enter the data Data validation is performed by the database server which checks that the column name exists 5 42 DB Access User Manual Defining Constraints Working with Unique Constraints The UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS menu lets you add modify or drop a unique constraint for the current table Select the Unique option on the CONSTRAINTS menu to access the UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS menu as shown in Figure 5 34 QUE CONS s b dif s i Figure 5 34 UNIQUE NSTRAINTS mytab Modi Dro creen Exit Add a unique Sen ae O id E The UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS menu Constraint Name cons2 Column Name columnl column2 column3 column4 The UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS menu displays any previously added unique constraints It
52. effect 5 28 DB Access User Manual Setting Table Options on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Setting Table Options on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Select the Table_options option from the CREATE TABLE menu to specify the storage location dbspace or fragment for a table and to set the extent sizes and or lock mode for a table in an OnLine database The next extent size and lock mode are available through the ALTER TABLE menu the dbspace and initial extent size are not Use this option to create or alter a fragmented table The TABLE_OPTIONS menu appears and guides you through the steps necessary to set various options for the table as shown in Figure 5 21 p Figure 5 21 TABLE_OPTIONS clients Storage eXtent_size Next_size Lock_mode Exit Define dbspace or fragmentation strategy for table storage TABLE_OPTIONS menu Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help Column Name Type Length Index Nulls The TABLE_OPTIONS menu displays the following options Storage displays another menu through which you can specify a dbspace in which to store the data in the table you created or define a fragmentation strategy for the table eXtent_size specifies the initial extent size for the table Next_size specifies the next extent size for the table Lock_mode specifies the lock mode for the table Page or Row Exit exits the TABLE_OPTIONS menu and returns you to the CREATE TABLE menu The Table Menu Option 5
53. for NLS or GLS Mode Creating the Demonstration Database Installing a Language Supplement Finding Your Way in DB Access How to Use Your Terminal 1 4 1 4 1 6 1 6 1 8 1 10 1 10 1 11 Chapter 2 iv DB Access User Manual Invoking DB Access Calling up the DB Access Main Menu Invoking DB Access and Selecting a Database Selecting a Menu Option Going to a Submenu and Submenu Option Executing a Command File Echoing File Input to the Screen Checking for ANSI Compliance Displaying Session Information Displaying the Software Version Number Activating the XLUF Feature for Nonprintable Characters Other Command Line Features The DB Access Main Menu The DB Access Menu Structure Using DB Access Menus and Screens Using Menu Screens Using Text entry Screens Using the HELP Screen Using a Text Editor Using the SQL Editor Using a System Editor Creating Databases and Tables Working with a Database Selecting a Database Creating a Database Dropping a Database Closing a Database Getting Database Information Working with a Table Creating a Table Modifying a Table Dropping a Table Getting Table Information The DB Access Facilities E Using the Interactive Schema Editor E Using SQL Statements Method 1 Using the Menu Options How To Create a Database Menu How to Select a Database Menu Leaving the Menu Where System Information Is Stored 112 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 2
54. for the column and table Foreign defines foreign key constraints for the column and table Check defines check constraints for the column and table Unique defines unique column constraints Defaults defines column defaults Exit leaves the CONSTRAINTS menu and returns you to the CREATE TABLE menu 5 34 DB Access User Manual Defining Constraints Defining Primary Key Constraints To add modify or drop primary key constraints for the current table select the Primary option on the CONSTRAINTS menu The PRIMARY KEY menu appears as shown in Figure 5 29 Figure 5 29 PRIMARY KEY mytab Add Modify Drop Screen Exit The PRIMARY KEY Add a constraint name or column name menu Page 1 of 1 Constraint Name Column Name constraintl columnl The PRIMARY KEY menu lists any existing constraints on the current table and has the following options Add adds a constraint name or column name Modify changes an existing primary key definition Drop removes an entire constraint or a column name Screen displays the next page of column names Exit leaves the PRIMARY KEY menu and returns you to the CONSTRAINTS menu The PRIMARY KEY Menu the Add Option Select the Add option to add a primary key referential constraint The schema editor inserts and highlights a new line at the top of the constraint list The ADD CONSTRAINT NAME prompt appears and the current field is Constraint Name Enter a constraint name and press RETUR
55. fragmentation strategy The NEW TABLE screen prompts you to enter the name you want assigned to the new table This table will store the records from the dbspace you previ ously selected through the DETACH DBSPACE screen You then return to the ALTER FRAGMENT round robin fragmentation strategy menu The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy If you choose to fragment by expression the following ALTER FRAGMENT menu appears when you select the Fragment option on the STORAGE menu as shown in Figure 5 63 Figure 5 63 ALTER FRAGMENT new_acct Modify Drop Screen Init aTtach detaCh Exit The ALTER Add expression to the fragmentation strate above the line with the highlight ve PO 7 A sae nara FRAGMENT menu Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help for expression Dbspace Name Expression fragmentation strategy dbspacel fieldl lt 100 dbspace2 fieldl gt 100 and fieldl lt 200 dbspace3 remainder 5 72 DB Access User Manual The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy Use this ALTER FRAGMENT menu to alter the expression fragmentation strategy for storing the data in a table The ALTER FRAGMENT menu for expression fragmentation strategy has the following options Add adds a new expression to the strategy The SELECT DBSPACE screen appears with a list of dbspaces from which to choose See The SELECT DBSPACE Menu on page 5 74 Modify modifies an existing strategy definition The SELECT DBSPACE screen a
56. in Chapter 3 of the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide How to Modify a Table SQL Issue the ALTER TABLE statement to modify the structure of a table in a database You can include various clauses in that SOL statement to add a column delete a column modify the data type of a column and add or drop a unique constraint associated with one or more columns in the table You must own the table have DBA privileges or be granted the Alter privilege on the table to use ALTER TABLE See the complete syntax and usage for the ALTER TABLE statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax 2 44 DB Access User Manual Adding a Column to a Table Adding a Column to a Table Include an ADD clause in an ALTER TABLE statement to add one or more columns to a table The following example adds another code column at the end of the cust_calls table assigning a CHAR data type and a length of 3 ALTER TABLE cust_calls ADD user_code CHAR 3 When you run this statement DB Access appends the user_code column to the list of columns You can add as many columns to the end of the table as you want as long as each column name is unique You can include a BEFORE clause with the ADD keyword of the ALTER TABLE statement to insert a new column before an existing column The following statement inserts the county column before the state column in the customer table ALTER TABLE customer ADD county CHAR 25 BEFORE sta
57. in local language 1 10 Options changing for table with the ALTER TABLE menu 5 62 for CONNECTION menu 6 4 for DATABASE menu 4 5 for main menu 1 29 for SQL menu 3 4 for TABLE menu 5 6 how to enter on a command line 1 12 how to get Help for 1 35 how to select on a menu 1 33 in local language 1 10 Output option Append file option 3 13 New file option 3 13 Printer option 3 12 SQL menu 3 12 To pipe option 3 14 P Page option on LOCK MODE menu 5 33 Password prompt in DB Access interactive mode 1 28 prompt on DB Access PASSWORD screen 6 5 PATH environment variable 1 6 Pathname entering for transaction log on SE 4 14 Pipe reading from 1 26 redirecting query results to a program 3 12 sending query results to 3 14 Primary key constraints adding 5 35 data validation 5 36 defining 5 35 dropping 5 36 information on 3 26 5 90 modifying 5 36 paging through 5 36 Printing the results of a query 3 12 Privileges displaying for a table 3 21 displaying information with the Privileges option 3 23 Procedures displaying stored 4 18 profile file 1 7 1 9 Q Query appending results to an existing file 3 13 sending results to a file 3 13 sending results to a pipe 3 14 sending results to a printer 3 12 storing results in a new file 3 13 Query language using with DB Access 2 12 Query language option how to use 3 4 on the main menu 3 3 R Reading from standard input 1 25 REFERENCE men
58. menu 6 4 CONSTRAINTS menu 3 26 CREATE DATABASE menu 4 13 4 15 CREATE TABLE menu 2 27 5 9 5 10 5 19 5 28 DATABASE INFO menu 4 16 DATABASE menu 4 5 LOCK MODE menu 5 33 LOG menu 4 13 REFERENCE menu 3 26 RUN screen 3 8 3 29 5 92 SQL menu 3 4 TABLE menu 5 6 TABLE OPTIONS menu 5 29 5 63 Expression displaying fragmentation strategy 3 30 5 93 Expression strategy ADD ROWIDS menu in DB Access 5 75 ALTER FRAGMENT menu in DB Access 5 72 ATTACH TABLES menu in DB Access 5 76 DB Access EDIT EXPRESSION menu 5 53 DB Access EXPRESSION menu 5 52 DB Access FRAGMENT menu 5 50 DB Access SELECT DBSPACE screen 5 53 DEFINE ATTACH POSITION menu 5 78 EDIT EXPRESSION menu in DB Access 5 77 FRAGMENT menu in DB Access 5 75 NEW TABLE screen in DB Access 5 80 SELECT ATTACHING TABLE screen in DB Access 5 77 Extent size getting information on 2 49 setting with the Table_options option 5 31 eXtent_size option TABLE OPTIONS menu 5 29 5 62 F Facilities for DB Access 2 10 File appending query results to 3 13 command provided with demo database 3 16 command selecting 3 15 command shown A 2 creating to store query results in 3 13 reading from standard input 1 26 saving current SQL statement in 3 18 saving SQL statements in 3 15 storing query results in 3 12 system 3 18 cshre 1 7 1 9 dat extension for data 2 29 idx extension for indexes 2 29 login 1 7 1 9 lok extension for locking 2 29 profile 1 7 1 9 sql
59. menu again For certain column definitions DB Access first displays another MODIFY screen If you modify a data type you might need to enter additional information DB Access displays a screen that prompts you for this information Consider the following examples a Changing a column to the CHARACTER data type causes DB Access to display the MODIFY LENGTH screen so you can specify the length of the CHARACTER field a Changing a column to a DATETIME data type causes the MODIFY DATETIME QUALIFIER screens to appear a Changing a column to an INTERVAL data type causes the MODIFY INTERVAL QUALIFIER screens to appear a Changing acolumn toa VARCHAR data type causes the MODIFY MAXIMUM LENGTH and MODIFY MINIMUM SPACE screens to appear a Changing a column to a TEXT or BYTE data type causes the MODIFY BLOBSPACE screen to appear If you modify a unique index on a column you see a screen that asks you to MODIFY DUPLICATES Not all data types can be changed to other kinds of data types Data types and their requirements are described in Chapter 3 of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference and in Chapter 3 of the Guide to GLS Functionality See the discussion of indexing in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax and in the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide Move the highlight to the next field that you need and repeat the process When you select Exit to leave the screen you see the EXIT menu Press RETURN to s
60. message For example if you try to create a table that has already been created you see the following kind of message at the bottom of the screen 310 Table mavis mystock already exists in database If you try to execute a command that contains more than one SQL statement you might not see the error message immediately If for example the first statement is a SELECT that runs correctly and the next statement contains a typing error the data retrieved by the first statement appears on the screen before the error message appears for the second statement The Query language Menu Option 3 7 Viewing the Next Page of Data Viewing the Next Page of Data When you run a statement such as a SELECT the query might retrieve more rows than can fit on a single screen In this case you see a screen such as the one shown in Figure 3 4 Figure 3 4 ey ioe oe ict es man en i stores7 dbserver1 adaltional ie results customer_num call_dtime user_id call_code call_descr res_dtime res_descr customer_num call_dtime user_id call_code call_descr res_dtime res_descr 1993 06 12 08 20 maryj D Order was received but two of the cans of ANZ tennis balls within the case were empty 1993 06 12 08 25 Authorized credit for two cans to customer issued apology Called ANZ buyer to report the QA problem 110 1993 07 07 10 24 riche L Order placed one month ago 6 7 not received 1993 07 07 10 30 Checked with shippin
61. of 1 mydata mydbserv INFORMIX SE Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial 101 Unique No fname Char 15 Yes 1name Char 15 Yes company Char 20 Yes With INFORMIX SE the ALTER TABLE menu displays the same options as OnLine except for Table_options In addition there is no sTorage option on the ALTER TABLE menu for INFORMIX SE it appears only on the CREATE TABLE menu Exiting the ALTER TABLE Screen To leave the ALTER TABLE screen without altering a table press the Interrupt key You return to the TABLE menu The Table Menu Option 5 57 Adding a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu 1 5 58 DB Access User Manual Adding a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu The procedure for using the schema editor to add a column to a table with the ALTER TABLE menu is the same as for adding a column to a table with the CREATE TABLE menu The following steps outline how to add a column Select the Add option on the ALTER TABLE menu Use the Arrow keys to move the highlight to the line where you want to add a column Press RETURN DB Access displays the following screens in order for the column you want to add Field to Add Screen Name Column Name ADD NAME Column Data Type ADD TYPE Column Length ADD LENGTH Index on Column ADD INDEX Column Allows Nulls ADD NULLS Type your column definitions on the top line of the screen and press RETURN Move the highlight to the next column definition field that
62. of information you see when you select the Columns option for the cust_calls table Figure 5 80 Column name Type y E Display of column customer_num INTEGER information call_dtime DATETIME VEAR TO MINUTE user_id CHAR 18 call_code CHAR 1 call_descr CHAR 240 res_dtime DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE res_descr CHAR 240 The Indexes Option Figure 5 81 shows the kind of information you see when you select the Indexes option for the cust_calls table Index name Owner Type Cluster Columns Figure 3 81 Display of index c_num_dt_ix velma unique No customer_num information call_dtime c_num_cus_ix velma dupls No customer_num The Privileges Option Figure 5 82 shows the kind of table level access privileges information you see when you select the Privileges option for the cust_calls table User Select Update Insert Delete Index Alter Figure 3 82 Display of privileges public All All Yes Yes Yes No information If you want information about database level privileges use a SELECT statement to access the sysusers system catalog table 5 86 DB Access User Manual User betty wilma public Table Name Owner Row Size Number of Rows Number of Column Date Created Audit Trail File The References Option The References Option Figure 5 83 shows the kind of information you see when you select the References option for a table that has referential integrity Column References Figure 5 83
63. only an issue in the ALTER TABLE menu Otherwise unique constraint manipulation through the ALTER TABLE menu behaves the same as it does using the CREATE TABLE menu If you try to modify a unique constraint using the Modify option in the UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS menu an error occurs The UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS Menu the Drop Option Select the Drop option to drop a unique constraint or column name If the current field is Column Name the column name is dropped If the current field is Constraint Name the constraint name is dropped and all column names associated with that constraint name are also dropped The UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS Menu the Screen Option The Screen option moves you to the next page of constraints if they span more than one screen The UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS Menu the Exit Option The Exit option returns you to the CONSTRAINTS menu Data Validation When you enter a unique constraint DB Access validates your entry by verifying the following information m The column name exists m The column name is not repeated 5 44 DB Access User Manual Defining Constraints m There are no more than 16 column names in one constraint for the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server or 8 column names for the INFORMIX SE database server m The column is not assigned the BYTE or TEXT data type Defining Default Values The DEFAULTS menu lets you define default values for columns in a table Select the Defaults option on the C
64. over the sample command files To create and populate the stores7 demonstration database 1 Set the INFORMIXDIR environment variable so that it contains the name of the directory in which your Informix products are installed Set INFORMIXSERVER to the name of the default database server The name of the default database server must exist in the INFORMIXDIR etc sqlhosts file For a full description of environment variables see the Informix Guide to SQL Reference For information about sqlhosts see the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide or the INFORMIX SE Administrator s Guide Create a new directory for the SOL command files Create the directory by entering the following command mkdir dirname Make the new directory the current directory by entering the following command cd dirname Create the demonstration database and copy over the sample command files by entering the dbaccessdemo7 command To create the database without logging enter the following command dbaccessdemo dbname To create the demonstration database with logging enter the following command dbaccessdemo7 log dbname If you are using INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server by default the data for the database is put into the root dbspace If you wish you can specify a dbspace for the demonstration database Introduction 7 Demonstration Database 8 DB Access User Manual To create a demonstration database in a particular dbspace e
65. the trigger information Select Restart at any time to display the trigger information from the beginning Press RETURN to continue viewing the results or Exit to return to the TABLE menu 5 92 DB Access User Manual The Table Option The Table Option Select the Table option from the INFO menu to redisplay the INFO FOR TABLE menu as shown in Figure 5 95 so you can select a new table about which to request information INFO FOR TABLE gt gt Figure 5 95 gt gt Choose a table with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The INFO FOR TABLE screen stores7 dbserverl customer orders The Fragments Option Figure 5 96 shows the kind of information you see when you select the Fragments option for a table created with a round robin fragmentation strategy Dbspace Figure 5 96 Display of dbspaces Deras for round robin fragmentation Figure 5 97 shows the kind of information you see when you select the Fragments option for a table created with an expression fragmentation strategy Dbspace Expression Figure 5 97 Display of dbspaces dbspacel P dbspace2 and expressions for expression fragmentation The Table Menu Option 5 93 Dropping a Table Dropping a Table Use the Drop option on the TABLE menu to drop an existing table schema from the database Press the D key or highlight Drop and press RETURN DB Access displays the DROP TABLE screen as shown in Figure 5 98 Fig
66. the ADD CHECK VALUE menu shown in Figure 5 33 or MODIFY CHECK VALUE menu This menu lets you select the SQL editor or specify a system editor so you can enter the check constraint value Figure 5 33 ADD CHECK VALUE cons99 Modify Use editor Exit The ADD CHECK Enter a new check value using the SQL editor VALUE menu SS S S E L__ L SSeS The ADD CHECK VALUE menu has the following options New enters a new check value using the SQL editor Modify modifies the current check value using the SQL editor Use editor modifies the current check value with a user specified editor Exit leaves the ADD CHECK VALUE menu If you break from the ADD CHECK VALUE menu or exit without defining the check value you return to the CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu If you defined the check value you remain in add mode a new line is inserted the Constraint Name is the current field and the ADD CONSTRAINT NAME prompt appears The CHECK CONSTRAINTS Menu the Modify Option Use the Modify option to change the constraint name or value for the selected constraint m Ifthe current field is Constraint Name the MODIFY CONSTRAINT NAME prompt appears m Ifthe current field is Value the MODIFY CHECK VALUE menu appears and you can enter a value See the ADD CHECK VALUE menu on page 5 41 The Table Menu Option 5 41 Defining Constraints The CHECK CONSTRAINTS Menu the Drop Option The Drop option lets you
67. the Type field the highlight moves to this field automatically See Specifying the Column Length or Other Param eters on page 5 16 Type the new length and press RETURN DB Access changes the entry under Length and redisplays the CREATE TABLE screen so you can make further changes 5 24 DB Access User Manual Modifying a Column in a Table Modifying the Column Index Move the highlight to an entry in the Index field of a column and select Modify DB Access displays the MODIFY INDEX screen as shown in Figure 5 17 MODIFY INDEX lients Y N Figure 5 17 clients es o Specifies that this column will NOT have an index The MODIFY INDEX screen Page 1 of 1 Column Name customer_num fname iname company addressl address2 city state zipcode phone Press CTRL W for Help Type Length Index Nulls Serial Unique No Char L Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes The MODIFY INDEX screen has the following options Yes creates an index on the column No does not create an index on the column Press RETURN or select Yes on the MODIFY INDEX screen If you press RETURN the default is No and an existing index is dropped If you specify Yes the MODIFY DUPLICATES screen appears and you can indicate whether to allow duplicate values m Press the Y key and the word Dups appears in the Index field m Press the N key and the word Unique appe
68. the command line 1 15 selecting options from the command line 1 18 selecting the Alter option 5 54 selecting the CREATE TABLE screen 5 7 selecting the Drop option 5 94 selecting the Info option 5 83 the INFO FOR TABLE screen 5 93 TABLE OPTIONS menu 5 29 Table_options option ALTER TABLE menu 5 56 CREATE TABLE menu 5 9 tblspace defined 2 29 TERM environment variable 1 6 TERMCAP environment variable 1 6 termcap file 1 6 Terminal as standard input 1 26 how to use the keys 1 11 setting the TERM environment variable 1 6 specifying termcap file or terminfo directory 1 6 Terminal keys Arrows 1 11 BACKSPACE 1 11 CONTROL 1 11 DELETE 1 11 ESCAPE 1 11 14 DB Access User Manual Interrupt 1 11 RETURN 1 12 SPACEBAR 1 12 terminfo directory 1 6 TERMINFO environment variable 1 6 Text editing with the SQL editor 1 37 editing with the system editor 1 39 how to enter on a screen 1 34 including comments in 1 38 TEXT data type 5 15 Text editor how to use 1 36 internal editor 1 38 SQL editor 1 38 Transaction logging specifying for OnLine database 4 12 specifying for SE database 4 14 TRANSACTION menu 4 22 6 8 Transactions committing before closing a database 4 22 6 9 rolling back before closing a database 4 22 6 9 TRANSACTION menu 4 22 6 8 Triggers displaying for a table 3 21 displaying header and body 3 29 U Unbuffered logging on OnLine 4 13 on SE 4 14 Unique constraints adding 5 43 data validation 5 44 defining 5 43
69. the command line You must specify a file name in the command Each line that is read from the specified file with or without a specified database appears on the screen For example say the file froggie sql contains the following SQL statement CREATE DATABASE newt The following command dbaccess froggie sql shows the following message on the screen Database created However the following command with the e option dbaccess e froggie sql shows the following lines on the screen CREATE DATABASE newt Database created Note that if DB Access is invoked in interactive mode echoing does not occur Working with DB Access 1 21 Checking for ANSI Compliance Checking for ANSI Compliance You can check your SOL statements for compliance with ANSI standards by including the ansi parameter or by setting the DBANSIWARN environment variable dbaccess ansi causes DB Access to generate a warning whenever it encounters an Informix extension to ANSI syntax Use the ansi option with other dbaccess options such as dc to create a database tc or ta to create or alter a table or qc filename to choose a command file If DBANSIWARN is set you do not need to specify ansi on the DB Access command line Enter the following command to choose the scales sql command file in the skink database and check for ANSI compliance when you run the chosen command file dbaccess ansi skink qc scales Enter the followin
70. the highlight to the next line however you must use the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE menu to change your entry as described in Modifying a Column in a Table on page 5 21 Naming the Column Select the Add option on the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE menu and DB Access displays the ADD NAME screen with the highlight under the Column Name as shown in Figure 5 5 ADD NAME gt gt Figure 5 5 Enter column name RETURN adds it INTERRUPT returns to CREATE ALTER menu The ADD NAME screen for naming Page 1 of 1 mydata mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help columns in a table Column Name Type Length Index Nulls EA AA The Table Menu Option 5 11 Adding a Column to a Table Type the name of the column after the prompt at the top of the ADD NAME screen and press RETURN The column name appears as shown in Figure 5 6 ADD NAME gt gt Figure 5 6 Enter column name RETURN adds it INTERRUPT returns to CREATE ALTER menu The ADD NAME Page 1 of 1 mydata mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help Column Name screen with column name entered Type Length Index Nulls customer_num 5 12 DB Access User Manual You can assign any name as long as you adhere to the following guidelines The name you assign to the column can be from 1 to 18 characters inclusive The column name must begin with a letter or underscore _ The rest of the name can consist of any combination of letters numb
71. the table Creating Databases and Tables 2 29 Using the Alter Option Using the Alter Option You can use the Alter option on the TABLE menu to make changes to the structure of a table or its fragmentation strategy Select the Alter option and DB Access prompts you for the name of the table you want to modify Enter the table name and DB Access displays the ALTER TABLE menu and accesses the schema editor Use the following options on the ALTER TABLE menu to make your changes to the table schema Add lets you add one or more columns to the table schema Modify lets you modify a column definition by changing one or more of the five schema headings Column Name Type Length Index and Nulls Drop lets you remove an entire column from the table schema Table_options lets you alter or define a fragmentation strategy for storing the records in a table and add or drop a rowids column If the table schema is long it might require more than one screen Use the Screen option on the ALTER TABLE menu to scroll to the next screen of the schema and locate the column you want to modify To alter a table you must be the owner of the table have DBA privileges in the current database or be granted the ALTER privilege on the table Adding a Column to a Table The procedure for adding a column to a table schema is the same as that used to create a table with the schema editor 1 Select the Alter option on the TABLE menu DB Access asks
72. triGgers Option When you select the triGgers option from the INFO menu the INFO FOR TRIGGER menu appears as shown in Figure 3 29 mas Seno Figure 3 29 INFO FOR TRIGGER gt gt Choose a trigger with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The INFO FOR TRIGGER menu Press CTRL W for Help Choose a trigger from the list of trigger names in the current table If you do not want to choose a trigger press the Interrupt key and you return to the TABLE INFO menu 3 28 DB Access User Manual The Table Option If the header and body information for the selected trigger fit on one screen the INFO menu reappears displaying the trigger information as shown in Figure 3 30 0 Figure 3 30 INFO updrec_t PER triGgers Status Table Exit Display header and body information for a trigger Display of trigger information on the stores7 dbserverl INFO menu create trigger updrec_t unit_price on stock referencing old as pre_upd new as post_upd insert into log_record values stock_num CURRENT pre_upd unit_price post_upd unit_price for each row The header information for a trigger consists of the CREATE TRIGGER statement and trigger name the SQL statement that triggers an event and the referencing clause The body of a trigger is the triggered action For more information on triggers see the CREATE TRIGGER statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax If the trigger is found and the
73. type length type of index and whether the column allows null values Figure 2 2 shows the finished table schema for the customer table in the stores7 database 0 Figure 2 2 CREATE TABLE customer Add Modify Drop Screen Table_options Exit Adds columns to the table above the line with the highlight The schema for the customer table Page 1 of 1 stores7 dbserverl Press CTRL W for Help OnLine Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial Unique No fname Char Yes iname Char Yes company Char Yes address1 Char Yes address2 Char Yes city Char Yes state Char Yes zipcode Char Yes phone Char Yes AAA The dbschema utility provided with your database server enables you to quickly produce an SOL command file that contains the statements required to replicate an entire database or selected table See the Informix Migration Guide for a detailed description of the dbschema utility Also see Appendix A in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference for information on the structure and contents of the stores7 database which comes with DB Access Using SQL Statements SOL is an English like interactive query language that you can use when working with relational databases The SOL supplied with DB Access is an enhanced version of the industry standard SQL developed by IBM With SQL in DB Access you can perform the following database management tasks Selecting connecting to creating closing and dropping data
74. values in the column For the customer_num column definition DB Access automatically supplies a value for the Nulls column The word No appears under the Nulls heading because null values should not be allowed in a SERIAL column 2 24 DB Access User Manual Calling Up the Table Schema Defining the Next Column The ADD NAME screen appears again as shown in Figure 2 26 with the first line of the schema completed and the highlight at the left of the next line DB Access is ready for you to define the next column o Figure 2 26 ADD NAME gt gt Enter column name RETURN adds it INTERRUPT returns to CREATE ALTER menu Using menu options to create a table the Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help ADD NAME screen Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial 101 Unique No AAA Name another column and enter a different data type only one column in a table can have a SERIAL data type Continue building the schema Correcting Mistakes in the Schema If you make a mistake when entering information about a column you can back up and correct it while you are still defining the same column still working on the same line Use the right and left Arrow keys to move the highlight back and forth under the headings in that line and make your corrections If you notice a mistake in a column definition after you move to another column use the Alter option as described in How To Modify a Table in the Database Men
75. where DBNLS is set is an NLS database Only NLS SQL APIs can access this database through NLS database servers The database server rejects any request to access an NLS database by a non NLS SQL API Only non NLS SQL APIs can access a non NLS database through non NLS database servers Differences Between OnLine and SE When you create a database the database name must be unique within an INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server With INFORMIX SE each database name within a given directory must be unique Each computer can have multiple OnLine database servers and separate OnLine database servers can contain the same database name However on the same database server the database name must be unique With INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server the new database is stored in the root dbspace unless you specify another dbspace With INFORMIX SE the new database is stored in the current directory or in the specified directory if you include the full pathname in the database name on the CREATE DATABASE screen 4 10 DB Access User Manual Differences Between OnLine and SE If you have multiple OnLine database servers you can create a database on another OnLine database server by specifying the server name with the database name at the prompt on the CREATE DATABASE screen Either of the following examples specifies the troppo database on the tonga database server troppo tonga tonga troppo The first method is preferred Remember to include qu
76. without dropping a table press the Interrupt key You return to the TABLE menu The Table Menu Option 5 95 The Connection and Session Menu Options Choosing the Connection Option 2 2 2 2 2 2 ee eee 6 4 Connecting toa Database Environment 6 4 Disconnecting from a Database Environment 6 8 Choosing the Session Option 2 2 2 2 a ee es 6 10 6 2 DB Access User Manual his chapter describes how to use the following features of the Connection and Session options on the DB Access main menu m Select the Connection option if you want to connect to a specific data base server and database or explicitly disconnect from the current database environment m Select the Session option to display information about the current DB Access session For amap of the DB Access menu hierarchy plus an overview of how to work with menu text entry and on line Help screens refer to Chapter 1 Working with DB Access See Chapter 2 Creating Databases and Tables for infor mation on creating databases See the discussion of the CONNECT and DISCONNECT statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for information on connection terminology Tip You should be aware of the following issues involving Native Language Support NLS m When you connect to or open a database the LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE setting must be the same as the ones shown in the session information If the set
77. you want to modify select the Choose option These SQL menu options are illustrated and described in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option If you decide you would rather work with the system editor press ESC to return to the SQL menu and then select the Use editor option Using a System Editor When you know that you are entering or modifying a long SQL statement or series of statements you might prefer the flexibility and familiarity of a system editor to the SQL editor Select the Use editor option from the SQL menu to use the system editor The first time in a session that you select the Use editor option DB Access might display a USE EDITOR screen such as the one shown in Figure 1 12 USE EDITOR gt gt vi Figure 1 12 Enter editor name RETURN only for default editor Sample system editor screen for entering and modifying SQL statements stores7 dbserverl If you have already specified an editor in this session or if the DBEDIT environment variable has been set DB Access calls up that editor immediately and does not display the USE EDITOR screen DB Access assumes a default operating system editor Common UNIX system editors are vi as shown in Figure 1 12 and ex You can specify a different default text editor by setting the DBEDIT environment variable See the description of DBEDIT in Chapter 4 of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference for information about specifying a system editor Press RETURN to s
78. 0 1 20 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 24 1 25 1 29 1 30 1 32 1 32 1 34 1 35 1 36 1 36 1 39 2 6 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 9 2 9 2 10 2 10 2 11 2 15 2 15 2 17 2 18 2 19 Chapter 3 How To Create a Table in the Database Menu Calling Up the Table Schema es Exiting the Schema Editor Specifying Column Constraints Creating a Fragmented Table Where Table Information Is Stored How To Modify a Table in the Database Saal Using the Alter Option How To Get Table Information Menu How to Drop a Table Menu How to Drop a Database Menu How to Close a Database Menu How to Get Database Information Menu Method 2 Using SQL How To Create a Database SQL How to Select a Database SQL How to Create a Table SQL Assigning Column Constraints Creating an Index on a Table How to Modify a Table SQL Adding a Column to a Table Modifying a Column in a Table Dropping a Column from a Table Renaming a Column in a Table Adding and Dropping Constraints Modifying Fragmentation Strategy How To Get Table Information SQL How to Drop a Table SQL How to Drop a Database SQL How to Close a Database SQL The Query language Menu Option Choosing the Query language Option Entering a New SQL Statement Running an SQL Statement Running Error Free Statements What Happens When There Are Errors Viewing the Next Page of Data Modifying an SQL Statement Editing an SQL Statement 2 19 2
79. 2 ALTER ROWIDS Drop None Exit The ALTER ROWIDS Enable rowids for the current table menu for adding or Press CTRL W for Help dropping rowids Use the ALTER ROWIDS menu to add a rowid column to or drop the rowid column from a fragmented table A table must already be fragmented in order for this option to take effect 5 64 DB Access User Manual Altering the Fragmentation Strategy of a Table The ALTER ROWIDS menu has the following options Add enables rowids for a fragmented table It displays the ADD ROWIDS menu which allows you to add a rowid column to the current table Drop drops rowids from a fragmented table It displays the DROP ROWIDS menu which lets you drop the rowid column from the current table None disregards a Drop or Add option that was previously selected for the current table during the session Exit exits the ALTER ROWIDS menu and returns you to the TABLE_OPTIONS menu The ADD ROWIDS Menu Select the Add option from the ALTER ROWIDS menu and the ADD ROWIDS menu appears as shown in Figure 5 53 Figure 5 53 OWIDS bs No ae ETIE NN The ADD ROWS Press CTRL W for Help The default for the ADD ROWIDS menu is Yes Press RETURN if you want to enable rowids for the current table Select No if you do not want to enable rowids for the current table You return to the ALTER ROWIDS menu The DROP ROWIDS Menu Select the Drop option from the ALTER ROWIDS menu and the DROP ROWIDS menu
80. 20 2 26 2 27 2 28 2 29 2 29 2 30 2 35 2 35 2 37 2 38 2 39 2 40 2 41 2 42 2 42 2 43 2 44 2 44 2 45 2 45 2 46 2 47 2 47 2 48 2 48 2 50 2 50 2 51 3 3 3 6 3 7 3 7 3 8 3 10 Table of Contents v vi Chapter 4 DB Access User Manual Redirecting Query Results Sending Output to a Printer Sending Output toa File Sending Output to a Pipe Choosing an Existing SQL Statement Sample SQL Command Files Saving the Current SQL Statement Displaying Table Information The Columns Option The Indexes Option The Privileges Option The References Option The Status Option The cOnstraints Option The triGgers Option The Table Option The Fragments Option Dropping an SQL Statement The Database Menu Option Choosing the Database Option Selecting a Database The SELECT DATABASE Scre h Differences Between OnLine and SE Exiting the Screen Creating a Database Differences Between OnLine atid SE The OnLine CREATE DATABASE Menu i The INFORMIX SE CREATE DATABASE Menu Displaying Database Information i Retrieving Information on Dbspaces Retrieving Information on Native Language Support y Retrieving Information on Stored Procedures Selecting a Different Database Exiting the Screen Dropping a Database The DROP DATABASE Screen Confirming Your Decision to Drop a Database Exiting the Screen Closing a Database 3 12 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 18 3 19 3 22 3 23 3 23
81. 4 18 DATABASE menu available options 4 5 cLose option 4 21 Drop option 4 20 Info option 4 15 Select option 4 6 selecting from the command line 1 15 selecting options from the command line 1 16 1 17 shown 4 5 the CREATE DATABASE screen 4 9 the DROP DATABASE screen 4 20 the SELECT DATABASE screen 4 6 Database server connecting to 6 4 disconnecting from 6 8 displaying session information on 6 10 SELECT DATABASE SERVER screen 6 4 selecting from a menu 6 4 DATE data type 5 14 DATETIME data type 5 14 DB Access ALTER FRAGMENT menu expression 5 72 ALTER FRAGMENT menu no strategy 5 80 ALTER FRAGMENT menu round robin 5 67 connecting to database server with command file or shell file 1 28 facilities 2 10 finding your way in 1 10 FRAGMENT menu 5 49 main menu 1 29 menu hierarchy 1 30 PASSWORD prompt screen 6 5 STORAGE menu ALTER TABLE 5 64 USER NAME prompt screen 6 5 using CONNECT in command file 1 28 using CONNECT in shell file 1 28 what it is 1 4 DBNLS environment variable 1 8 DBPATH environment variable 1 6 dbspace adding to round robin fragmentation strategy 5 51 defined 2 19 defining expression for 5 52 5 53 deleting from existing strategy 5 51 5 67 DETACH DBSPACE screen 5 71 displaying fragmentation strategy 3 30 5 93 for fragmented tables 2 28 modifying current 5 51 selecting available ones for storing table data 5 30 5 49 selecting from the SELECT DBSPACE screen 4 12
82. 6 system 1 39 text 1 36 ENABLE CASCADING DELETES menu 5 38 Environment variables DBANSIWARN 1 22 2 12 DBEDIT 3 10 DBNLS 1 8 4 4 4 18 6 3 DBPATH 1 6 3 15 4 8 DELIMIDENT 1 7 INFORMIXDIR 1 6 INFORMIXSERVER 1 6 INFORMIXTERM 1 6 LANG 1 8 4 18 6 4 LC_COLLATE 1 8 3 15 3 31 4 4 4 20 6 3 LC_CTYPE 1 8 4 4 6 3 LC_MONETARY 1 8 LC_NUMERIC 1 9 LC_TIME 1 9 ONCOMFIG 4 8 PATH 1 6 required for DB Access 1 6 required for NLS 1 8 setting for default editor 1 39 SQLRM 1 6 SQLRMDIR 1 6 TERM 1 6 TERMCAP 1 6 TERMINFO 1 6 what to set 1 6 where to set 1 7 1 9 Error messages in local language 1 10 Errors accessing anon NLS database 4 4 6 3 accessing an NLS database 4 4 6 3 connecting to a database 6 3 connecting to a server after opening a database 6 9 correcting in the schema 2 25 correcting with the SQL editor 3 9 editing in SQL statements 3 11 entering a fill factor 5 18 executing command files A 1 for incorrect NLS environment variable settings 4 18 in the local language 1 10 LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE settings do not match 4 4 modifying a constraint 5 44 no CONNECT permission 6 6 out of extents for tblspace 5 31 running SQL statements 3 7 syntax caused by keywords 4 9 syntax when naming a database 5 8 syntax when naming a table or column 5 12 using command line options 1 18 where to find text of messages 3 10 ESCAPE key 1 11 1 37 Exit option ALTER TABLE menu 5 56 CONNECTION
83. 9 Using menu options to create a table naming the table CREATE TABLE gt gt Enter the table name you wish to create with the schema editor mydata mynewdb Press CTRL W for Help Enter a table name this chapter uses the name clients and press RETURN See Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option for guidelines on naming a table if you decide not to use clients DB Access next displays the CREATE TABLE menu as shown in Figure 2 20 Figure 2 20 Using menu options to create a table the Page 1 of 1 mydata mynewdb Press CTRL W for Help CREATE TABLE CREATE TABLE clients Ada Modify Drop Screen Table_options Constraints Exit Adds columns to the table above the line with the highlight Column Name Type Length Index Nulls menu OnLine IO The CREATE TABLE menu displays the name of the current database and the table that you want to create using the schema editor 2 20 DB Access User Manual Calling Up the Table Schema Building the Table Schema The CREATE TABLE menu works with the schema editor to design the table schema Whenever you select the Create or Alter option on the TABLE menu to create or alter a table schema you are using the schema editor The CREATE TABLE menu displays the schema for the table on the bottom portion of the screen Each horizontal line in the schema represents one column in the table with the name of the column at the left To create a table schema define each column in
84. ATE SCHEMA REVOKE CREATE SYNONYM ROLLBACK WORK CREATE TABLE SELECT CREATE TRIGGER SET CREATE VIEW SET DEBUG FILE TO DATABASE SET EXPLAIN DELETE SET LOCK MODE DISCONNECT SET OPTIMIZATION DROP DATABASE SET TRANSACTION DROP INDEX START VIOLATIONS TABLE DROP PROCEDURE STOP VIOLATIONS TABLE DROP SYNONYM UNLOAD DROP TABLE UNLOCK TABLE DROP TRIGGER UPDATE DROP VIEW UPDATE STATISTICS Some of these SQL statements have branches or syntax that work only with OnLine or INFORMIX SE or behave differently depending on the database server See Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for details on using each of these statements Creating Databases and Tables 2 13 Using SQL Statements Dynamic Server ALTER FRAGMENT GRANT FRAGMENT REVOKE FRAGMENT SET DATASKIP You can run the statements listed in Figure 2 5 only with INFORMIX OnLine SQL statements you can run only with OnLine Figure 2 5 SET ISOLATION SET LOG SET PDQPRIORITY for information CREATE OPTICAL CLUSTER DROP OPTICAL CLUSTER You can run the statements listed in Figure 2 6 only with INFORMIX OnLine Optical See the INFORMIX OnLine Optical User Manual ALTER OPTICAL CLUSTER Figure 2 6 SQL statements you can run only with OnLine Optical RELEASE RESERVE SET MOUNTING TIMEOUT database server CHECK TABLE CREATE AUDIT DROP AUDIT 2 14 DB Access User Manual You can run the statements listed in Figure 2 7 only with the INFORMIX SE SQL stat
85. Add option on the ALTER FRAGMENT round robin menu and the SELECT DBSPACE screen appears as shown in Figure 5 56 Dbspaces are listed with the default or current selection highlighted r Figure 5 56 SELECT DBSPACE gt gt Select a dbspace with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT DBSPACE screen for Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help round robin strategy when dbspace2 altering a table dbspace3 The SELECT DBSPACE screen displays a list of dbspaces from the current OnLine database server and prompts you to select the one you want to add to the current round robin fragmentation strategy Select a dbspace and you are returned to the ALTER FRAGMENT menu The FRAGMENT Menu Select the Init option on the ALTER FRAGMENT round robin strategy menu and the ALTER FRAGMENT menu appears as shown in Figure 5 57 Figure 5 57 ALTER FRAGMENT INIT new_acet eXpression Dbspace rOwids Exit The ALTER Select and define a round robin fragmentation strategy e FRAGMENT menu Page 1 of 1 newstores mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help for defining or altering round robin fragmentation strategy 5 68 DB Access User Manual The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Round robin Strategy The ALTER FRAGMENT menu has the following options Round_robin selects and defines a round robin strategy for fragmentation eXpression selects and defines an expression strategy for fragmentation Dbspace selects the dbspace in
86. Column MODIFY INDEX Column Allows Nulls MODIFY NULLS 4 Type your field modification on the top line of the screen and press RETURN The Table Menu Option 5 21 Modifying a Column in a Table MODIFY NAME gt gt Enter column name Page 1 of 1 mydata mydbserv Column Name 5 Move the highlight to the next field as needed and repeat the process For details see the discussion of the ADD screens for each field in the table schema beginning with Adding a Column to a Table on page 5 10 6 When you select Exit to leave the screen you see the EXIT menu Press RETURN to select the default Build new table You can also press the D key or move the cursor to the Discard new table option with an Arrow key and press RETURN DB Access accordingly builds or discards the table and returns you to the TABLE menu You can press the Interrupt key at any time to leave a Modify screen or menu without making any changes The Modify screens function much the same as the Add screens do The Modify screens are described briefly in the following sections For more information see the sections relating to the Add screens in Adding a Column to a Table on page 5 10 Modifying the Column Name Use the MODIFY NAME screen to change the name of a column in the table Highlight the column name that you want to change and select the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE screen The MODIFY NAME screen appears
87. DB Access You can close a database by issuing the CLOSE DATABASE statement Issue the DISCONNECT statement to terminate your connection to a database and database server if it was established with the CONNECT statement For details see Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option and the discussion of the CLOSE DATABASE and DISCONNECT statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax 4 22 DB Access User Manual The Table Menu Option Selecting the TABLE Menu a 2 ee ee 55 Creating a Table Ea detona hy a da Gt ete Oe 3056 The CREATE TABLE Screen bo Ue Ge ale Se Riese Bie Gea E alge een 5 7 Naming the Table 2 2 2 2 een 5 8 Building the Table Schema oH A Honea GA O Differences Between OnLine and SE eas ay EP ae Rh Gna O Exiting the CREATE TABLE Menu 5 10 Adding a Column to a Table 2 2 5 10 Naming the Column ee tO pusr d Toret N Defining the Column Data Type ae ES Specifying the Column Length or Other Parameters foo ok ane 5 16 Defining an Index fortheColumn 2 2 5 17 Allowing Null ValuesintheColumn 5 18 Adding to the Table Schema 5 19 Building the Table Schema 2 2 we BO Modifying a Column in a Table 2 1 1 5 21 Modifying the Column Name 5 22 Modifying the Column DataType 2 2 2 1 5 23 Modifying theColumnLength
88. DBSPACE screen expression 5 53 SELECT DBSPACE screen round robin 5 51 cshrc file 1 7 1 9 CTRL A 1 37 CTRL D 1 26 1 37 CTRL R 1 37 CTRL W 1 35 B 1 CTRL X 1 37 Current database specifying 4 5 Current statement definition of 2 12 Current table constraints on 5 35 Cursor how to move for text entry 1 37 moving on the terminal screen 1 11 position when using SOL editor 1 37 where displayed on menu screens 1 32 where displayed on text entry screens 1 34 D Data manipulating with DB Access 1 4 validation of check constraints 5 42 Index 3 validation of default column values 5 48 validation of primary key constraints 5 36 validation of unique constraints 5 44 viewing the next page on the screen 3 8 Data types adding column 5 13 BYTE 5 15 CHAR 5 13 DATE 5 14 DATETIME 5 14 DECIMAL 5 14 defining for a column with the schema editor 2 22 5 13 described 5 15 FLOAT 5 14 INTEGER 5 14 INTERVAL 5 14 modifying 5 21 5 23 modifying column 5 23 MONEY 5 14 NCHAR 1 10 5 13 NVARCHAR 1 10 5 15 on ADD TYPE screen 5 13 on MODIFY TYPE screen 5 59 SERIAL 5 14 SMALLFLOAT 5 14 SMALLINT 5 14 specifying parameters for 5 16 TEXT 5 15 VARCHAR 5 14 Data validation check constraints 5 42 default column values 5 48 primary key constraints 5 36 unique constraints 5 44 Database closing 4 21 closing one with active transactions 4 22 6 8 closing with a menu option 2 38 closing with an SQL statement 2 51 closing with the CL
89. DEC or NUMERIC stores decimal floating point numbers from 1 to 32 significant digits inclusive with definable precision and scale Only the first 16 digits of decimal values appear on the screen SMALLFLOAT data type also known as REAL stores single precision floating point numbers with approximately 8 significant digits FLOAT data type also known as DOUBLE PRECISION stores double precision floating point numbers from 1 to 16 significant digits inclusive SERIAL data type stores a positive sequential integer maintained by the database DATE data type stores a calendar date MONEY data type stores a currency amount DATETIME data type stores an instant in time expressed as a calendar date and time of day INTERVAL data type stores a value that represents a span of time When you select this option from the ADD TYPE menu the ADD VARIABLE LENGTH TYPE menu appears listing the following variable length data types which are available only on OnLine VARCHAR data type stores a character string of varying length ranging in size from 0 to 255 bytes GLS Adding a Column to a Table NVARCHAR data type for national variable character stores a national character string of varying length ranging in size from 0 to 255 bytes NLS mode only TEXT data type stores any kind of text data with the maximum determined by available disk storage You must specify a table and or a blobspace name If you choose Table the
90. D_ROBIN menu brings up the SELECT DBSPACE screen Dbspaces are listed and the default or current selection is highlighted as shown in Figure 5 41 0 Figure 5 41 SELECT DBSPACE gt gt Select a dbspace with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT DBSPACE screen for Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help round robin strategy when dbspace2 creating a table dbspace3 The SELECT DBSPACE screen displays all the dbspaces associated with the current OnLine database server and prompts you to select the ones you want for your round robin fragmentation strategy If you select a dbspace that is already part of another strategy you get an error message Select a dbspace and press RETURN You return to the ROUND_ROBIN menu and the screen displays all dbspaces currently chosen for the strategy The Table Menu Option 5 51 Defining a Fragmentation Strategy The EXPRESSION Menu Select the eXpression option on the FRAGMENT menu to display the EXPRESSION menu as shown in Figure 5 42 Figure 5 42 EXPRESSION new_acct adad modify Drop screen Exit The EXPRESSION Add a strategy definition o menu for defining Page 1 of 1 mydata mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help expression Dbspace Name Expression fragmentation strategy dbspacel fieldl lt 100 dbspace fieldl gt 100 and fieldl lt 200 dbspace3 remainder Use the EXPRESSION menu to define the expression fragmentation strategy that determines
91. Decision to Drop a Database Confirming Your Decision to Drop a Database When you choose to drop a database DB Access displays a special screen header that asks for confirmation before it drops the database as shown in Figure 4 21 Figure 4 21 to drop it The DROP DATABASE confirmation screen stores7 dbserverl The default is No which helps prevent dropping a database by mistake If you truly want to drop the highlighted database press the Y key or use the right Arrow key to highlight Yes and press RETURN DB Access drops the database and all data in the database is deleted Be absolutely sure that you choose the correct database to drop You also can issue the DROP DATABASE statement to drop a database For details see Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option and the discussion of the DROP DATABASE and CLOSE DATABASE statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Exiting the Screen To leave the DROP DATABASE screen without dropping a database press the Interrupt key You return to the DATABASE menu Closing a Database To close the current database choose the cLose option from the DATABASE menu by pressing the L key or highlight the option and press RETURN You then see the message Database Closed at the bottom of the screen indicating that the current database is closed The database name disappears from the Help line but the database server name remains The Database Menu Option 4 21 Closi
92. E TABLE and ALTER TABLE menus Using the INFORMIX SE Database Server The sTorage option on the CREATE TABLE menu is the INFORMIX SE counterpart to the Table_options option in the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server It lets you specify the full path and filename in which to store a database table You can issue the CHECK TABLE and REPAIR TABLE statements to check and repair the indexes of a table following an abnormal stoppage These SQL statements call the secheck utility With OnLine the oncheck utility checks and repairs index inconsistencies Certain other SQL statements or keywords might be specific to INFORMIX SE The syntax and use for all SOL statements that you can use with DB Access are listed in Chapter 2 Creating Databases and Tables of this manual and are described in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax The Log option on the CREATE DATABASE menu provides different options for INFORMIX SE and OnLine These options are described in Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option Working with DB Access 1 5 Preparing to Use DB Access Preparing to Use DB Access This section describes the steps you must follow before you can work with DB Access It tells how to specify an NLS and a non NLS environment It explains how to set environment variables and use the demonstration database that is provided with DB Access and also acquaints you with conventions for using your terminal It assumes that either the INFO
93. ETURN to choose that option You can select other menu options in one of the following ways m Use the SPACEBAR or the left and right Arrow keys to highlight the option you want and then press RETURN m Type the first capitalized letter of the option you want to select case is not important On some menus such as this one more than one option can start with the same letter To distinguish among the options you select one by typing the first capitalized letter in the option name For instance on the DATABASE menu press the C key to select the Create option press the L key to select the cLose option DB Access displays the screen for the menu option you select Leaving a Menu Screen Most menus have an Exit option When you want to leave a menu screen press the E key for Exit DB Access then displays the previous menu or screen If you exit from the main menu you return to the operating system If there is no Exit option use the Interrupt key to exit the menu Getting Help Press CTRL W to display a HELP screen that provides information about the highlighted menu option When you indicate that you have finished viewing the HELP screen text DB Access redisplays the menu you were working with before you asked for help For details see Using the HELP Screen on page 1 35 Working with DB Access 1 33 Using Text entry Screens Using Text entry Screens On a DB Access text entry screen you enter or select text instead
94. FO FOR TABLE gt gt stores topend bunyip customer The Columns Option Figure 3 16 shows the kind of information you see when you select the Columns option for the cust_calls table Column name Type Figure 3 16 Display of column customer_num INTEGER information call_dtime DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE user_id CHAR 18 call_code CHAR 1 call_descr CHAR 240 res_dtime DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE res_descr CHAR 240 3 22 DB Access User Manual The Indexes Option The Indexes Option Figure 3 17 shows the kind of information you see when you select the Indexes option for the cust_calls table Figure 3 17 Index name Owner Type Cluster Columns Display of index information c_num_dt_ix velma unique No customer_num call_dtime c_num_cus_ix velma dupls No customer_num The Privileges Option Figure 3 18 shows the kind of table level access privileges information you see when you select the Privileges option for the cust_calls table Select Update Insert Delete Index Alter Figure 3 18 Display of privileges All All Yes Yes Yes No information If you want information about database level privileges you must use a SELECT statement to access the sysusers system catalog table The References Option Figure 3 19 shows the kind of information you see when you select the References option for a table that has referential integrity Column References Figure 3 19 Display of coll references information co
95. Functionality Additional environment variables or X Open categories such as the ones in the following list provide more specific information that affects the behavior of data manipulation a LC_COLLATE specifies a particular NLS collating sequence It is used throughout the lifetime of the database and overrides the LANG setting a For example with LANG set to German you might want to set LC_COLLATE to a value for German Swiss collating conventions o LC_CTYPE determines the behavior of regular expressions and character evaluation functions space punctuation capitalization o LC_MONETARY specified the money format including national currency symbol Creating the Demonstration Database o LC NUMERIC determines the format for numeric values including the decimal separator a LC_TIME defines the national date and time format including country specific names and abbreviations for days of the week and months For example with LANG set to German you might want to set one or more of the above environment variables to a value for German Swiss cultural conventions You can set these environment variables at the system prompt in your profile Bourne shell or Korn shell file in your login or cshre C shell file or in an environment configuration file m If you set these environment variables at the system prompt you must reassign them every time you log on to the system m If you set these environment va
96. INDEX screen 5 17 creating with the CREATE INDEX statement 2 44 displaying information with the Indexes option 3 23 5 86 displaying name owner type clustering and columns with the Info option 3 21 modifying column 5 25 specifying a fill factor 5 17 Indexing a column specifying unique or duplicate values with the schema editor 2 23 the ADD INDEX screen 5 17 with the schema editor 2 23 INFO FOR TABLE screen 5 83 INFO menu available options 3 21 5 84 Columns option 3 22 5 86 cOnstraints option 3 24 5 88 displaying column information 3 21 5 84 displaying column references information 3 21 5 84 displaying constraint information 3 21 5 88 displaying table index information 3 21 5 86 displaying table privileges information 3 21 5 86 displaying table status information 3 21 5 87 displaying trigger information 3 21 5 92 exiting 3 21 5 85 Fragments option 3 30 5 93 Indexes option 3 23 5 86 listing tables 3 21 5 85 8 DB Access User Manual option on the SQL menu 3 20 option on the TABLE menu 5 83 Privileges option 3 23 5 86 References option 3 23 5 87 Status option 3 24 5 87 triGgers option 3 28 5 92 with SQL 5 84 Info option Columns option 3 21 5 86 cOnstraints option 3 21 5 88 DATABASE menu 4 15 Exit option 3 21 5 85 Indexes option 3 21 5 86 Privileges option 3 21 5 86 References option 3 21 5 87 SQL menu 3 19 Status option 3 21 5 87 TABLE menu 5 6 5 56 5 83 Table option 3 21 5 85 triGgers
97. LS settings for the character type and collating sequence You cannot use any other dbaccess options with s Figure 1 3 is an example of what you see on the screen when you use the s command line option Figure 1 3 DBACCESS Query language Connection Database Table Session Exit Sample DB Access Retrieve information about the current DB Access session A menu with session Press CTRL W for Help information Server OnLine Connected to coral Multi threaded DRDA gateway Capabilities NLS Distributed XA NLS Capabilities and Attributes fr_FR 88591 Collating Sequence C CType Working with DB Access 1 23 Displaying the Software Version Number Displaying the Software Version Number You can display the version number for DB Access without invoking the utility dbaccess We vor V displays the name version number and serial number of the DB Access software that is installed DB Access takes no further action after displaying the version number on the screen Enter other commands described in this section to invoke and work with the utility You cannot use any other dbaccess options with v or V Figure 1 4 shows an example of what appears when you use the v or V command line option DB Access Version 7 2 UC1 Figure 1 4 Software Serial Number AAA R123456 The DB Access version number Activating the XLUF Feature for Nonprintable Characters You can activate the hexadecimal load unload f
98. N If you press RETURN in this field without entering a constraint name the database server assigns a temporary constraint name such as unassigned1 unassigned2 and so on This temporary constraint name exists until you modify it or the table is built or discarded A permanent constraint name is assigned by the database server at the time you create the table The next current field for entry is Column Name The ADD COLUMN NAME prompt appears Enter a column name and press RETURN to add it The Table Menu Option 5 35 Defining Constraints Depending where you are in the process continue to press the Interrupt key or select the Exit option to return to the CREATE TABLE menu without adding a primary constraint The PRIMARY KEY Menu the Modify Option The Modify option lets you modify the current field The MODIFY CONSTRAINT NAME prompt is displayed for the Constraint Name field the MODIFY COLUMN NAME prompt is displayed for the Column Name field Enter a new constraint or column name and press RETURN to modify it Press the Interrupt key if you do not want to modify a primary constraint The PRIMARY KEY Menu the Drop Option The Drop option lets you drop the constraint or column name depending on whichever field is current If the highlighted field is Constraint Name then all columns associated with that constraint are dropped The line s are removed and any gaps are closed in the display The PRIMARY KEY Menu the Sc
99. NFO FOR TABLE menu so you can select a new table about which to request information on the INFO menu See The Table Option on page 3 29 displays fragmentation strategy for the selected table See The Fragments Option on page 3 30 leaves the INFO menu and returns you to the SQL menu The Query language Menu Option 3 21 The Columns Option Select an option by using the Arrow keys to highlight it with the cursor or type the first capitalized letter in the option name Depending on the option you immediately see a display of information or you have to enter data ina new menu or screen before the information appears Important You cannot find out the initial and next extent sizes or the lock mode for a table through the Info option You can however view and change the extent size and lock mode options through the Table_options option on the CREATE TABLE menu which is available through the Table option on the main menu You can also issue a SELECT statement within the SQL menu to access the systables system catalog table You cannot find out the dbspace OnLine or pathname INFORMIX SE through the Info option You can use the Info option to request information about external tables on an INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server database server by entering the expanded table name at the prompt The following example requests infor mation on the table bunyip customer in the stores7 database on the OnLine database server topend IN
100. NTS menu appears Select the option for the kind of constraint you want to modify or drop from the following list Primary drops primary key constraints Use the Drop option on the PRIMARY KEY menu to remove an entire primary key constraint or column name Use the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE menu to change an existing primary key definition Foreign drops foreign key constraints Use the Drop option on the ALTER FOREIGN KEY menu to remove the entire constraint or a referencing referenced column pair Use the Modify option on the CREATE FOREIGN KEY menu to change a foreign key definition Check drops check constraints Use the Drop option on the CHECK CONSTRAINT menu to drop the current check constraint Use the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE menu to change the name or value of a check constraint Unique drops unique constraints Use the Drop option on the UNIQUE CONSTRAINT menu to drop the current unique constraint Use the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE menu to change the name of a unique constraint or column Defaults modifies or drops default values Use the Modify option on the DEFAULTS menu to change the column name default type or default value of a column use the Drop option to drop a column default Creating Databases and Tables 2 33 Using the Alter Option 2 34 DB Access User Manual You can also select the appropriate option to add a primary key constraint if one does not exist add a lin
101. OL 1 11 CTRL A 1 37 CTRL D 1 26 1 37 CTRL R 1 37 CTRL W 1 35 B 1 CTRL X 1 37 DELETE 1 11 ESCAPE 1 11 1 37 Interrupt 1 11 RETURN 1 12 SPACEBAR 1 12 used with SQL editor 1 37 Korn shell setting environment variables 1 7 1 9 L LANG environment variable 1 8 Language supplement 1 10 LC_COLLATE environment variable 1 8 LC_CTYPE environment variable 1 8 LC_MONETARY environment variable 1 8 LC_NUMERIC environment variable 1 9 LC_TIME environment variable 1 9 Length modifying column 5 24 specifying for column data types 5 16 Lock mode how to get information on 2 49 specifying page or row 5 32 LOCK MODE menu 5 32 Lock_mode option on TABLE OPTIONS menu 5 29 5 63 Logging default on INFORMIX SE 4 15 on INFORMIX SE 4 14 on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server 4 12 specifying buffered or unbuffered 4 13 login file 1 7 1 9 M Main menu available options 1 29 Database option 1 29 displaying from the command line 1 13 Exit option 1 30 map of DB Access menu hierarchy 1 31 Query language option 1 29 3 3 selecting the Connection option 2 18 6 4 selecting the Session option 6 10 selecting the Table option 5 5 structure in DB Access 1 30 Table option 1 30 Menu options altering a table 2 30 closing a database 2 38 CONNECTION menu 6 4 creating a database 2 15 creating a table 2 19 DATABASE menu 4 5 dropping a database 2 37 dropping a table 2 35 getting table information 2 35 in local language 1 10
102. ON menu has the following options New lets you enter a new expression using the SQL editor Modify lets you modify the current expression using the SQL editor Use editor lets you modify the current expression using a system editor Exit exits the EDIT EXPRESSION menu and returns to the EXPRESSION menu You have the option of entering a new expression or modifying the current expression using either the SOL editor or the system editor Once you have defined or edited the expression using the SOL editor or a system editor you are asked to confirm the changes DB Access displays the CONFIRM CHANGES menu as shown in Figure 5 45 Figure 5 45 CONFIRM CHANGES dbspacel SAVE piscarp The CONFIRM mdd ii CHANGES menu field1 lt 100 The default for this menu is SAVE Press RETURN to save the edits to the expression Select DISCARD to discard the edits to the expression You return to the EXPRESSION menu Altering a Table This section describes how to use the Alter option on the TABLE menu to change an existing table schema or table fragmentation strategy For infor mation on using the ALTER TABLE statement within SQL refer to Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option in this manual and Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax 5 54 DB Access User Manual The ALTER TABLE Screen The following sections describe one way to alter a table with the schema editor by using the ALTER TABLE menu You can achieve
103. ONS menu select the Storage option and the STORAGE menu appears Figure 2 30 STORAGE new_acct Fragment Exit The STORAGE menu Select a dbspace in which to store the table for storing table Page 1 of 1 mydata mynewdb Press CTRL W for Help data and defining fragmentation strategy Choose from the STORAGE menu to specify the dbspace in which to store the data in the table you created or to define a round robin or expression fragmentation strategy for storing the records in the table A fragmented table resides in two or more dbspaces a table that is not fragmented resides in a single dbspace For details see the discussion of fragmentation strategies in Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option Also see the discussion of fragmentation in the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide 2 28 DB Access User Manual Where Table Information Is Stored Where Table Information Is Stored With the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server information and associated indexes for tables you create are stored in a tblspace A tblspace is a logical grouping of extents The creator of a table can specify the initial extent size and next extent size and modify the latter using ALTER TABLE as a table grows Setting Table Options on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server on page 5 29 discusses how to set the extent sizes for a table using the Table_options option on the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE menu With the INFORMIX SE dat
104. ONSTRAINTS menu to access the DEFAULTS menu as shown in Figure 5 35 DEFAULTS mytab Modify Drop Screen Exit Bh eid Add a column default hond Page 1 of 1 Column Name Type column1 User column3 Null column5 Today column6 Current Fraction to Fraction 5 column7 Literal column8 Literal The DEFAULTS menu has the following options Add adds a column default and enters the column name default type and default value Modify changes the column name default type or default value of a column Drop drops a column default Screen displays the next screen of defaults Exit leaves the DEFAULTS menu and returns you to the CONSTRAINTS menu You can see the first 28 characters of the value The Table Menu Option 5 45 Defining Constraints The DEFAULTS Menu the Add Option Select the Add option to add a column default The schema editor inserts a new line at the top of the list and makes the Column Name the current field The ADD COLUMN NAME prompt appears Enter a value for the column name and the ADD DEFAULT TYPE menu appears The ADD DEFAULT TYPE menu shown in Figure 5 36 lets you define the default value of a column in the current table ADD DEFAULT TYPE mytab Literal User Current Null Today Db server name Site name The abba Assign a literal default value using either the SQL editor or a system editor TYPE menu The ADD DEFAULT TYPE menu has the following options Literal assigns a literal default value using either
105. OSE DATABASE statement 2 51 closing with the cLose option 4 21 4 DB Access User Manual closing with the DISCONNECT menu 6 8 confirming your decision to drop 4 21 creating 4 9 creating an ANSI compliant one for OnLine 4 13 creating an ANSI compliant one for SE 4 14 creating tables in 2 19 2 29 creating through the main menu 2 15 creating with an SQL statement 2 41 creating with the menu options 2 15 current 4 3 directory extension for SE 2 19 displaying information for 4 15 distributed and NLS 4 4 dropping 4 20 dropping a table with DROP TABLE 2 50 dropping with a menu option 2 37 dropping with the DROP DATABASE statement 2 50 four ways to close 2 7 information on 4 15 naming 4 9 naming conventions 2 16 NES and non NLS server 4 4 NLS considerations 6 3 NLS defined 4 10 non NLS and NLS server 4 4 relational 1 4 retrieving information about 4 15 selecting from a menu 4 6 selecting from the command line 1 14 specifying logging for OnLine 4 12 specifying logging for SE 4 14 stores7 1 9 storing in a dbspace 4 12 three ways to select 2 7 turning on logging 4 11 two ways to create 2 7 two ways to drop 2 7 Database environment connecting to 6 4 disconnecting from 6 8 DATABASE INFO menu dBspaces option 4 17 how to exit 4 19 NLS option 4 17 options 4 16 Procedures option 4 18 with dbspaces information 4 17 Database information dbspaces for OnLine 4 17 NLS 4 17 stored procedures
106. PUT Enter the name of the file you want to append results to then press Return APPEND FILE stores7 dbserverl screen SELECT FROM customer The Query language Menu Option 3 13 Sending Output to a Pipe Type the name of an existing file where you want to append the query results and press RETURN DB Access appends the query results to the end of that file and displays a message indicating how many rows were retrieved The query results do not appear on the screen Sending Output to a Pipe If you want to send query results to a pipe select the To pipe option on the OUTPUT menu You then see the OUTPUT TO PIPE screen as shown in Figure 3 10 OUTPUT TO PIPE gt gt Figure 3 10 Enter the name of the pipe you want to send results to then press Return The OUTPUT TO PIPE screen stores7 dbserverl SELECT FROM customer Specify a filter program such as more to pipe output through and DB Access sends the results to that pipe if you have permission to run the program The query results do not appear on the OUTPUT TO PIPE screen 3 14 DB Access User Manual CHOOSE gt gt Choosing an Existing SQL Statement Choosing an Existing SQL Statement When you save SQL statements in a command file as described in Saving the Current SQL Statement on page 3 18 you can retrieve the command file and run or edit the SQL statements at any time Select the Choose option on the SQL menu The CHOOSE sc
107. QL Tutorial Specifying Table Storage on INFORMIX SE Select the sTorage option on the CREATE TABLE menu to specify the file where you want to store a database table The ADD STORAGE PATHNAME screen appears as shown in Figure 5 27 Figure 5 27 ADD STORAGE PATHNAME gt gt The ADD STORAGE Enter full path and filename in which to store the database table PATHNAME screen Page 1 of 1 Column Name mydata mydbserv Type Length Index Nulls Enter the full pathname and filename indicating where you want to store the table You then return to the CREATE TABLE menu The Table Menu Option 5 33 Defining Constraints Defining Constraints You can use the DB Access schema editor to define constraints for columns in a specified table on OnLine or SE You can define primary key foreign key column level and table level check and unique constraints as well as add and modify column default values Select the Constraints option from the CREATE TABLE menu and the CONSTRAINTS menu appears as shown in Figure 5 28 Figure 5 28 CONSTRAINTS mytab Primary Foreign Check Unique Defaults Exit The CONSTRAINTS Define a primary key constraint menu Using the CONSTRAINTS Menu Use the CONSTRAINTS menu to define and display primary key foreign key check and unique constraints as well as default values for the columns in the table The CONSTRAINTS menu has the following options Primary defines primary key constraints
108. RETURN Figure 2 9 Using menu options to create a database the Create option on A A A A O E A peg eet ere a the DATABASE menu Creating Databases and Tables 2 15 How To Create a Database Menu The CREATE DATABASE screen appears and prompts you to name the new database as shown in Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Using menu options to create a database Press CTRL W for Help the CREATE DATABASE screen CREATE DATABASE gt gt Enter the name you want to assign to the new database then press Return Type the database name on the top line this chapter uses mydata and press RETURN DB Access creates a database with that name and automatically makes it the current database It also displays the name of the current database server See Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option for guidelines on naming a database if you decide not to use mydata and for information on naming a database on another database server After you name a database the CREATE DATABASE menu appears with the name of the current database server mynewdb as shown in Figure 2 11 Figure 2 11 Se ee a aie eae Using menu options to create a database the CREATE DATABASE menu OnLine The INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server lets you specify a nonroot dbspace create a database with or without buffered transaction logging or create a database that is ANSI compliant The INFORMIX SE database server allows you to activate or deactivate transa
109. RMIX OnLine Dynamic Server or INFORMIX SE database server is installed on your computer according to the installation instructions that come with the database server software Setting Standard Environment Variables You must set the following Informix and UNIX environment variables before you can properly use DB Access in either an NLS or a non NLS environment m The INFORMIXDIR environment variable specifies the directory where your database server files are installed m The INFORMIXSERVER environment variable specifies the default INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server or INFORMIX SE database server to which an explicit or implicit connection is made m The INFORMIXTERM environment variable specifies whether DB Access should use the termcap file or terminfo directory to locate terminal capability information m The UNIX environment variable TERMCAP or TERMINFO must be set so that DB Access can communicate with your terminal m TERM is a UNIX environment variable that lets DB Access recognize and communicate with the kind of terminal you are using m PATH is a UNIX environment variable that determines the search path so that the shell searches the correct directory for executable DB Access files m If you are using a network connection and INFORMIX SE you might need to set the DBPATH environment variable and unset the SQLRM and SQLRMDIR environment variables 1 6 DB Access User Manual Setting Standard Environment Variables You ca
110. TE TABLE menu by pressing Interrupt an Arrow key or RETURN Building the Table Schema When you complete the schema for the new or modified table select the Exit option on the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE menu DB Access displays the EXIT menu as shown in Figure 5 12 Figure 5 12 EXIT clients Discard new table The EXIT menu used Builds a new table and returns to the Table Menu Page 1 of 1 Column Name customer_num fname 1name company addressl address2 city state zipcode phone for building a new Press CTRL W for Help table Type Length Index Nulls Serial Unique No Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Co The Table Menu Option 5 19 Building the Table Schema The EXIT menu lists the following options Build new builds the table with the new column definitions table Discard new discards the new table instructions table The default is Build new table Press RETURN to create the table and return to the TABLE menu Select the Discard new table option by pressing the D key or highlighting it with an Arrow key and pressing RETURN and you return to the TABLE menu without saving the new or modified table definition Figure 5 13 represents the schema editor version of the c_nls1 sql example command file which is provided for practice with NLS concepts if a language supplement is installed It shows the use of the NCHAR data type and f
111. TRL W for Help menu for defining fragmentation strategy The ALTER FRAGMENT INIT menu lets you define a round robin or expression fragmentation strategy for an existing table that does not have a fragmentation strategy defined The Table Menu Option 5 81 The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu No Fragmentation eXpression Dbspace rOwids Exit Page 1 of 1 eXpression Exit 5 82 DB Access User Manual The ALTER FRAGMENT INIT menu has the following options Round_robin lets you select and define a round robin strategy for table fragmentation lets you select and define an expression strategy for table fragmentation lets you select the dbspace into which you want to move all the records from the current table strategy lets you add a rowid column to the table being initialized exits the FRAGMENT menu and returns to the ALTER FRAGMENT menu Select the Attach option from the ALTER FRAGMENT menu and the ALTER FRAGMENT ATTACH menu appears as shown in Figure 5 76 Figure 5 76 ALTER FRAGMENT ATTACH new_acct eXpression Exit The ALTER Select and define a round robin fragmentation strategy FRAGMENT Press CTRL W for Help ATTACH menu for defining fragmentation strategy The ALTER FRAGMENT ATTACH menu lets you define a round robin or expression fragmentation strategy for one or more existing tables that do not have a defined fragmentation strategy The ALTER FRAGMENT ATTACH menu has the following opt
112. This section tells how to drop a database using the DB Access menu options These menu options are described in Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option On the DB Access main menu select the Database option and press RETURN to call up the DATABASE menu as shown in Figure 2 34 DATABASE Create Info D L Figure 2 34 elec Feate nto rop cLose Select database to work with Using menu options to drop a database the DATABASE menu Select the Drop option from the DATABASE menu and the DROP DATABASE screen appears as shown in Figure 2 35 DROP DATABASE gt gt Figure 2 35 Enter the name of the database you want to drop Using menu options to drop a database the DROP DATABASE menu stores7 mynewdb Type the name of the database you want to drop or highlight it using the Arrow keys and then press RETURN DB Access displays a special screen that asks for confirmation before it drops the database The default is No so you cannot drop a database by mistake If you want to drop the highlighted database Press the Y key or use the right Arrow key to highlight Yes and press RETURN DB Access drops the database and all its tables It also closes the current database if one is open Creating Databases and Tables 2 37 How to Close a Database Menu How to Close a Database Menu This section outlines how to close the current database using the DB Access menu options These menu options are described in C
113. URN DB Access displays the next screen or takes other appropriate action 1 34 DB Access User Manual Using the HELP Screen Other text entry screens such as some that are selected from the SOL menu might require you to enter text below the screen header These types of screens involve using a text editor See Using a Text Editor on page 1 36 Leaving a Text entry Screen Text entry screens do not have an Exit option When you want to leave a text entry screen press the Interrupt key usually DEL or CTRL C and DB Access displays the previous menu or screen Getting Help Press CTRL W to display a HELP screen that provides information about the operation of the current screen When you indicate that you have finished reading the HELP screen text DB Access redisplays the screen you were using before you asked for help See the next section Using the HELP Screen for details Using the HELP Screen Every DB Access menu and screen has a HELP screen associated with it The HELP screen contains information about your current options and suggests appropriate actions Whenever you want information about what to do next press CTRL W and DB Access displays a HELP screen Figure 1 9 shows some of the text that appears when you press CTRL W for information about the Run option on the SQL menu Figure 1 9 HELP Screen A partial HELP Displays the next page of Help text screen with text The Run option runs the
114. UT CANCEL or DEL On most systems you use the DELETE key to cancel or abort a program or to leave a current menu and return to the menu one level above This manual refers to the DELETE key as the DEL key or the Interrupt key The ESCAPE key might be labeled ESC It is frequently found in the upper left corner of your keyboard Working with DB Access 1 11 Invoking DB Access 1 12 DB Access User Manual RETURN The RETURN key might be labeled RETURN or NEWLINE or it might be indicated with a bent left Arrow It is located on the right side of the keyboard SPACEBAR The SPACEBAR is generally unlabeled Interrupt Issue the command stty a onthe command line and check the intr setting to see whether your terminal recognizes CTRL C or DELETE described earlier or another key as the Interrupt key Invoking DB Access You invoke DB Access by entering various command line options at the operating system prompt These options described in this section let you perform the following actions Invoke DB Access and display the main menu Invoke DB Access and select a database Go directly to a submenu Go directly to a submenu and submenu option Connect to a database environment Go directly to and execute a command file Echo to the screen all input that is read from a file Automatically check your SQL statements for ANSI compatibility Display session information on the main menu Display just the software version n
115. Y key or use the right Arrow key to highlight Yes and press RETURN DB Access displays the ADD LOG PATHNAME screen described above Enter the full log pathname and press RETURN You then return to the CREATE DATABASE menu Exiting the INFORMIX SE CREATE DATABASE Menu When you exit the CREATE DATABASE menu shown in Figure 4 12 you must confirm or discard the new database Figure 4 12 EXIT personnel Create new database Discard new database Creates a new database and returns to the Database Menu The CREATE DATABASE confirmation screen The default is Create new database Press RETURN to create a database with the specified parameters make it the current database and return to the DATABASE menu If you do not want to create the new database press the D key or use the right Arrow key to move the cursor to the Discard new database option and press RETURN DB Access does not create a new database If you exit without specifying a logging value the default is no logging Displaying Database Information Use the Info option on the DATABASE menu to display information about dbspaces NES collation and character classification type Ctype settings and the text of stored procedures for the active database Tip This Info option is different from the one that is available on the SQL menu described in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option and from the TABLE menu described in Chapter 5 Th
116. a rowid that was explicitly created you get an error message The ROUND_ROBIN Menu Select the Round_robin option on the FRAGMENT menu to display the ROUND_ROBIN menu as shown in Figure 5 40 Figure 5 40 ROUND_ROBIN new_acet ada Modify Drop Screen Exit The Add a dbspace to the fragmentation strategy above the line with the highlight ROUND_ROBIN Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help menu for defining Dbspace Name round robin fragmentation strategy dbspace2 This menu lets you select the dbspaces that will be used by a round robin strategy to store the records of the current table There is one field in this menu dbspace name The dbspace name refers to a dbspace in the current INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server 5 50 DB Access User Manual Defining a Fragmentation Strategy The ROUND_ROBIN menu has the following options Add adds a new dbspace to the round robin fragmentation strategy The SELECT DBSPACE screen appears with a list of dbspaces Modify lets you modify the current dbspace and thus the existing fragmentation strategy definition Drop deletes the current highlighted dbspace from the existing strategy It does not drop the dbspace from the OnLine database server Screen displays the next screen page of dbspaces for the fragmen tation strategy Exit exits the ROUND_ROBIN menu and returns to the FRAGMENT menu The SELECT DBSPACE Screen Round robin Strategy The Add option on the ROUN
117. abase server DB Access builds two system files for each table you create and stores them in the same directory as the system catalog tables These files have the same full or partial name as the table a unique number starting at 100 and an extension For example the two files representing the data and indexes for the clients table in the mydata dbs database directory are named clients110 dat and clients110 idx On certain platforms there is an additional file clients110 lok Specifying Table Storage on INFORMIX SE in Chapter 5 discusses how to specify the pathname for storing a database table using the sTorage option on the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE menu How To Modify a Table in the Database Menu After you create a table with the schema editor you might need to modify its structure This section describes how to use the Alter option from the TABLE menu to alter a database table For information on using the ALTER TABLE statement refer to Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Once you set up the schema for a table even after you put data into the table DB Access lets you change the way you store data Occasionally making a change of this kind might result in truncated data DB Access always warns you of this situation and gives you the option of not making the change For example when you change the length of a CHAR column from 20 to 10 DB Access truncates the last 10 characters of this column in each row of
118. able one at a time As you define each column the schema editor prompts you for information As you type information the schema editor fills in the table schema You move from left to right across the screen as you define each column and you move from top to bottom as you define additional columns 5 6 DB Access User Manual The CREATE TABLE Screen Each horizontal line in the editor represents one column with the name of the column at the left Each of the five headings in the editor presents some infor mation about the column such as the length of the column and the type of data it stores The schema editor lets you perform the following functions Adding a new column to the table Modifying the currently highlighted column of the table Deleting the currently highlighted column of the table Scrolling the next screen of schema information into the schema editor if the number of columns exceeds the capacity of the schema editor screen m Moving the cursor through the lines and fields of the schema editor and highlighting them with the Arrow keys Tip You also can use the CREATE TABLE statement to create a table You must use CREATE TABLE within the Query language menu not a TABLE menu option if you want to create a temporary table See Chapter 2 Creating Databases and Tables in this manual and Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for details The CREATE TABLE Screen When you select the Create optio
119. able using the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE statement column name data type length or starting number indexes and whether it allows null values You also can define foreign key primary key referential check and unique constraints as well as default column values 2 42 DB Access User Manual Assigning Column Constraints Each table in the stores7 demonstration database was created witha different CREATE TABLE statement The following example found in the c_calls sql command file creates the cust_calls table CREATE TABLE cust_calls customer_num INTEGER call_dtime DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE user_id CHAR 18 DEFAULT USER call_code CHAR 1 call_descr CHAR 240 res_dtime DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE res_descr CHAR 240 PRIMARY KEY customer_num call_dtime FOREIGN KEY customer_num REFERENCES customer FO ys cus REIG tomer_num KEY call_code REFERENCES call_type call_code You can also use the CREATE TABLE statement to create a fragmented table The following example shows a round robin fragmentation strategy CREAT F E TA RAGM The following CREAT F a a R E TA RAGM EMAI BLE newcust cust_id INTEGER phone CHAR 18 ENT BY ROUND ROBIN IN dbspacel dbspace2 example shows an expression fragmentation strategy BLE account acc_num INTEGER cust_id INTEGER phone CHAR 18 ENT BY EXPRESSION cc_ num lt 1120 in dbspacel cc_num gt 1120 and ac
120. ach index for a specified table whether the index is clustered and the names of the columns that are indexed See The Indexes Option on page 3 23 lists the users who have access privileges for the specified table and whether they have the table level Select Update Insert Delete Index and Alter privileges See The Privileges Option on page 3 23 Unless your login is listed separately you have the privileges given for public a general category for all users If you want information about database level privileges you must use a SELECT statement within the SOL menu to access the sysusers system catalog table lists the users who have the table level References privilege for the specified table and which columns they can reference See The References Option on page 3 23 lists the table name the table owner the size of the row in number of bytes the number of rows in the table as of the last UPDATE STATISTICS statement the number of columns in a row and the date the table was created On INFORMIX SE it also lists the name of the audit trail file if there is one See The Status Option on page 3 24 displays referential primary key check and unique constraints and default values for the columns in the specified table See The cOnstraints Option on page 3 24 displays header and body information for a specified trigger See The triGgers Option on page 3 28 redisplays the I
121. after you run the statement If you accidentally delete the wrong table you must re create it and restore all the data from a backup copy If you do not have a backup copy you must reenter all the data The following example drops a table that is in the current database and is owned by the current user DROP TABLE goanna See the complete syntax and usage for the DROP TABLE statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax How to Drop a Database SQL Issue the DROP DATABASE statement to drop a database If you want to drop the current database you must first run the CLOSE DATABASE statement You cannot drop a database that is in use even if you are the only one using it You must have the appropriate database privileges to drop a database Before you can drop a database be sure that you own all the tables in the database or have DBA privileges Remember when you drop a database you also lose all the tables indexes and data in that database Unlike the Drop option on the DATABASE menu this method does not give you a chance to reconsider after you run the statement The following example drops an INFORMIX SE database by specifying the full pathname DROP DATABASE riley snowy cooma 2 50 DB Access User Manual How to Close a Database SQL See the complete syntax and usage for the DROP DATABASE and CLOSE DATABASE statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax How to Close a Database
122. alter the fragmentation strategy for a table through the Storage and Rowids options on the TABLE_OPTIONS menu which appears when you select the Table_options option from the ALTER TABLE menu For more detailed information see Altering or Defining a Fragmentation Strategy on page 5 66 The Table Menu Option 5 63 Altering the Fragmentation Strategy of a Table The STORAGE Menu Select the Storage option on the TABLE_OPTIONS menu and the STORAGE menu appears as shown in Figure 5 51 Figure 5 51 STORAGE new_acct bospace Fragment Exit The STORAGE menu Select a dbspace in which to store the table for defining and Page 1 of 1 newstores mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help modifying fragmentation strategy Use the STORAGE menu to modify an existing fragmentation strategy for a table The STORAGE menu has the following options Dbspace This option is not valid for an existing table If you select it from the STORAGE menu through the ALTER TABLE menu you get an error message Fragment displays an ALTER FRAGMENT menu for one of three fragmen tation strategies depending on the current strategy for the table See the discussion of Altering or Defining a Fragmen tation Strategy on page 5 66 Exit exits the STORAGE menu and returns you to the TABLE_OPTIONS menu The ALTER ROWIDS Menu Select the Rowids option on the TABLE_OPTIONS menu and the ALTER ROWIDS menu appears as shown in Figure 5 52 Figure 5 5
123. and positions the cursor on the line with the first error You can correct the error using the SOL editor or you can press ESC to exit to the SOL menu and select the Use editor option to edit the statement with your system editor m If you use the SOL editor to make your corrections press ESC when you have finished editing the statement m If you use the system editor exit the file according to the convention for that editor You then return to the SOL menu where you can press RETURN to run the statement again The Query language Menu Option 3 9 Editing an SQL Statement Y Tip You can find the text of all error messages along with suggestions for correcting the errors in the Informix Error Messages manual Error messages and their corrective actions also are available in an on line file called errmsg txt located in the INFORMIXDIR msg directory For details on how to view on line error messages see the Introduction to the Informix Error Messages manual Editing an SOL Statement If you want to use a system editor to enter a new SQL statement or to modify an existing SQL statement or command file select the Use editor option on the SOL menu A text entry screen appears and lets you work in a temporary edit file If this is the first time in a session that you are calling a system editor or if the DBEDIT environment variable is not set you might be asked to select an editor before you can continue The s
124. appears as shown in Figure 5 54 Figure 5 54 DROP ROWIDS O Yes No The DROP ROWIDS Drop rowids from the current table menu Page 1 of 1 newstores mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help The Table Menu Option 5 65 Altering or Defining a Fragmentation Strategy The default for the DROP ROWIDS menu is Yes Press RETURN if you want to drop rowids from the current table Select No if you do not want to drop rowids from the current table You return to the ALTER ROWIDS menu Altering or Defining a Fragmentation Strategy You can use DB Access menus and screens to alter the existing fragmentation strategy for a fragmented table or to define a fragmentation strategy for a table that is not fragmented For information on determining the best fragmentation strategy for a table see the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide For information on the SQL statement syntax for fragmentation see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax To alter or define the fragmentation strategy for an existing table select the Table_options option from the ALTER TABLE menu Next select the Storage option from the TABLE_OPTIONS menu Then select the Fragment option on the STORAGE menu and an ALTER FRAGMENT menu appears The data displayed in the ALTER FRAGMENT menu depends on which fragmentation strategy has been used for the table m Ifthe fragmentation strategy for a table is round robin then the ALTER FRAGMENT menu for a round robin strate
125. are described in Using the SQL Editor on page 1 36 The Query language Menu Option 3 5 Running an SQL Statement When you use the SQL editor you can enter as many lines of text as the memory constraints of your system allows You are not limited by the size of the screen See the discussion in Chapter 1 Working with DB Access for additional restrictions If you prefer working with the system editor you can press ESC and select the Use editor option on the SQL menu This option is described in Editing an SQL Statement on page 3 10 When you finish entering a new SQL statement press ESC The SOL menu reappears and you can choose to run the statement Warning If current statements are on the screen and you do not save them in a command file with the Save option they are lost when you select the New option Running an SQL Statement The SQL menu reappears with the Run option highlighted and the statement text displayed in the bottom of the screen as shown in Figure 3 3 q Figure 3 3 SOL New Run Modify Use editor Output Choose Save Info Drop Exit P Run the current SQL statements The SQL menu with SQL statement text ready to run CREATE TABLE mystock stock_num SMALLINT manu_code CHAR 3 description CHAR 15 unit_price MONEY 6 unit CHAR 4 unit_descr CHAR 15 PRIMARY KEY stock_num manu_code CONSTRAINT stock_man_ primary FOREIGN KEY manu_code REFERENCES manufact Press
126. aries and costs You need to choose the appropriate data type for the kind of data that you intend to store in each column The available data types that you can use to name columns in tables are described in Chapter 3 of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference After you name a column the ADD TYPE menu appears as shown in Figure 2 22 Figure 2 22 Using menu options to create a table the Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help ADD TYPE menu Column Name Type Length Index Nulls OnLine ADD TYPE clients Char Number Serial Date Money date Time Interval Permits any combination of letters numbers and symbols You are now ready to assign a data type to the customer_num column The customer_num column contains the customer number for each store The SERIAL data type is appropriate for this column because you want to ensure that a unique number is assigned to each customer Press the S key to select Serial from the menu and DB Access displays the ADD STARTING NUMBER screen as shown in Figure 2 23 Figure 2 23 ADD STARTING NUMBER gt gt a Enter the starting number RETURN adds it Using menu options to create a table the Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help ADD STARTING Column Name Type Length Index Nulls NUMBER screen customer_num Serial DB Access displays the SERIAL data type under the Type heading of the schema and because you are describing a SERIAL column asks you for the number DB Access shoul
127. ars in the Index field DB Access changes the entry under Index and redisplays the CREATE TABLE screen so you can continue to modify the table schema This option creates a nonclustered ascending index for the values in the associated database column To create a different type of index use the CREATE INDEX statement to change clustering for an index use the ALTER INDEX statement See the discussion of indexing in Chapter 3 of the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide The Table Menu Option 5 25 Modifying a Column in a Table MODIFY NULLS Modifying the Nulls Entry Use the Arrow keys to highlight an entry in the Nulls field of a column and select Modify DB Access displays the MODIFY NULLS screen as shown in Figure 5 18 Permits null values in this column Page 1 of 1 Column Name customer_num fname 1name company address1 address2 city state zipcode phone Figure 5 18 clients 1 No The MODIFY NULLS screen Press CTRL W for Help Type Length Index Nulls Serial Unique No Char Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes The MODIFY NULLS screen displays the following options Yes allows null values in the column No does not allow null values in the column Press the Y key or RETURN to allow null values in that column press the N key to specify no null values DB Access changes the entry under Nulls and redis plays the CREATE TABLE screen
128. ase column To create a different type of index use the CREATE INDEX statement See the discussion of indexing in Chapter 3 of the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide Allowing Null Values in the Column After you define the column name data type and index you can specify whether the column allows null values DB Access displays the ADD NULLS screen shown in Figure 5 11 for this purpose Figure 5 11 ADD NULLS clients Yes No Permits null values in pre column The ADD NULLS screen Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial 101 Unique __ The ADD NULLS screen displays the following options Yes allows null values in the column No does not allow null values in the column 5 18 DB Access User Manual Adding to the Table Schema The default is Yes Press RETURN or the Y key to allow null values in that column and move the highlight to the next column definition line Press the N key to specify that null values are not allowed and move the highlight to the next column definition line Adding to the Table Schema Once you specify the name data type length index and null values for a column the column definition is complete The highlight moves to the next line in the schema editor DB Access redisplays the ADD COLUMN NAME screen where you perform the following functions m Add another column definition to the table m Return to the CREA
129. atabase displays the DATABASE menu Choose this option to select create drop or close a database or to retrieve information about the database See Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option Working with DB Access 1 29 The DB Access Menu Structure Table displays the TABLE menu Select this option to create modify or drop a table in the current database See Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option Session displays information about the database server the host computer and NLS support See Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options Exit exits DB Access and returns you to the operating system For detailed descriptions of these options consult the indicated chapters of this manual The DB Access Menu Structure The Query language Connection Database and Table options on the DB Access main menu each call a submenu that displays additional options the Session option does not Figure 1 6 illustrates the top levels of the DB Access menu structure or hierarchy 1 30 DB Access User Manual The DB Access Menu Structure Figure 1 6 The DB Access menu hierarchy New enters new SQL statements using the SQL editor Run runs the current SQL statements Modify modifies the current SQL statements using the SQL editor Use editor uses a system editor to modify the current SQL statements Output sends the results of the current SQL statements to a printer file or pipe Choose chooses a file that conta
130. atements that select create and drop a database Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option illustrates and describes how to use the options on the DATABASE menu which appears when you select the Database option from the DB Access main menu Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options illustrates and describes how to connect to and disconnect from a specific database environment by using the options on the CONNECTION menu which appears when you select the Connection option from the DB Access main menu Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax contains the complete syntax and usage of all SOL statements such as DATABASE CREATE DATABASE DROP DATABASE CONNECT DISCONNECT and others that operate on a database Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial contains an overview of database fundamentals Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference contains infor mation on ANSI databases Also in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference Appendix A describes the structure and contents of the stores7 demonstration database and Chapter 2 provides details of the Informix system catalog which describes the structure of the stores7 database and Information Schema views The Guide to GLS Functionality provides information on NLS databases and Global Language Support features Selecting a Database Selecting a Database The database you use is called the current database DB Access lets you select a curren
131. ause in a CONNECT statement as shown in the second example DB Access prompts you for a password using echo suppression gt connect to starfish user marae ENTER PASSWORD Connected For security reasons you should not type the password on the screen where it can be seen Thus you should not include the USING clause in a CONNECT statement in interactive mode If you do DB Access cannot prompt you in background mode and returns an error Connecting with a File or Shell File in Background Mode You can execute the USER clause of aCONNECT statement in a DB Access file or shell script and can include the USING clause The following example uses a command file that contains a CONNECT statement with a USER clause to connect to a database server dbaccess connfile sql Important You can explicitly include the USING password clause of a CONNECT statement in a DB Access command file but for security reasons you should make the command file read only by the user The following example uses a shell file to connect to a database server DB Access prompts you for a password dbaccess lt lt connect to starfish user marae l ENTER PASSWORD Viewing the XPG4 Information Schema The Information Schema consists of a set of four views from which you can retrieve information about any table view and column to which you have access The views conform to X Open XPG4 with Informix extensions The Informati
132. aying Database Information on page 4 15 Exiting the Screen To leave the DATABASE INFO menu without displaying information about the current database press the Interrupt key You return to the DATABASE menu The Database Menu Option 4 19 Dropping a Database Dropping a Database To drop an existing database on a specified database server select the Drop option from the DATABASE menu The DROP DATABASE screen appears as shown in Figure 4 20 0 Figure 4 20 DROP DATABASE gt gt Enter the name of the database you wish to drop The DROP DATABASE screen stores7 dbserverl mydata dbserverl stores7 dbserverl personnel mynewdb In NLS mode the list of database names is sorted according to the current LC_COLLATE setting in DB Access The order in which the database names are listed might vary depending on the setting You cannot drop the current database The DROP DATABASE Screen You can drop a database using the DROP DATABASE screen in either of the following ways m Type the database name and press RETURN m Use the Arrow keys to highlight the name of the database you want to drop and then press RETURN For example to drop the mydata database type mydata or highlight mydata dbserver1 with an Arrow key and then press RETURN 4 20 DB Access User Manual CONFIRM No Yes No I do not want mydataldbserverl stores7 dbserverl personnel mynewdb Confirming Your
133. bases Creating modifying and dropping tables in a database Entering deleting and updating data in a table Querying a database Renaming tables and columns Creating Databases and Tables 2 11 Using SQL Statements SQL statements or Informix extensions to SQL let you load and unload database tables into ASCII text files change databases and change the names of tables and columns Additional Informix extensions increase the function ality of standard SQL statements The uses of SOL and statement syntax conventions are described in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Using SQL with DB Access Use SQL with DB Access to enter one or more SQL statements A statement is simply an instruction that tells DB Access what to do For example to create a table use the CREATE TABLE statement to query a database use the SELECT statement Select the Query language option on the DB Access main menu From this menu you can go to the SOL menu shown in Figure 2 3 to enter and run SQL statements The various menu options and screens used for this purpose are described in detail in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option Figure 2 3 soL New Run Modify Use editor Output Choose Save Info Drop Exit Enter new SQL statements using the SQL editor The SQL menu for entering SQL statements DB Access remembers the last sequence of statements if any that you used These statements are called the current statements Thr
134. ble eXtent_size specifies the initial extent size for the table E Important You cannot change the initial extent size it is set when you first create the table 5 62 DB Access User Manual Altering the Fragmentation Strategy of a Table Next_size specifies the next extent size for the table Lock_mode specifies the lock mode for the table Page or Row Rowids lets you add a rowid column to a table during the creation or alteration of a fragmented table Exit exits the TABLE_OPTIONS menu and returns you to the ALTER TABLE menu Important You can change only one option on the TABLE_OPTIONS menu during each ALTER TABLE session If you change the next extent size or locking mode and want to change the other valid table option you must exit the ALTER TABLE menu build the modified table and then start another ALTER TABLE session m For information on using the Storage or Rowids option to alter frag mentation strategy see Altering the Fragmentation Strategy of a Table m For details about changing the next extent size and locking mode see Setting Table Options on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server on page 5 29 m For additional information on locking see Chapter 7 of the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial m For additional information on calculating table sizes see Chapter 3 of the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide Altering the Fragmentation Strategy of a Table This section outlines how to
135. buffered logging Specifying Logging on INFORMIX SE Select the Log option if you want to activate or deactivate transaction logging and the ACTIVATE LOGGING menu appears as shown in Figure 4 9 Figure 4 9 pe coe LER ae ion logging The ACTIVATE LOGGING menu for INFORMIX SE The default is No Press RETURN if you do not want to activate logging and you return to the CREATE DATABASE menu If you want to activate logging press the Y key or use the right Arrow key to highlight Yes and press RETURN DB Access displays the ADD LOG PATHNAME screen as shown in Figure 4 10 ADD LOG PATHNAME gt gt Figure 4 10 Enter the pathname of the log The ADD LOG PATHNAME screen for INFORMIX SE Enter the full pathname for the transaction log and press RETURN You then return to the CREATE DATABASE menu Creating an ANSI compliant Database on INFORMIX SE Select the Mode_ansi option if you want to create an ANSI compliant database that has mandatory unbuffered transaction logging The ACTIVATE MODE ANSI menu appears as shown in Figure 4 11 o st No Figure 4 11 ACTIVATE MODE ANST No Yes No do not activate mode ANSI The ACTIVATE MODE ANSI menu for INFORMIX SE 4 14 DB Access User Manual Displaying Database Information The default is No Press RETURN if you do not want to activate ANSI compliance You then return to the CREATE DATABASE menu If you want to activate ANSI compliance press the
136. c_num lt 2000 in dbspace2 DER in dbspace3 See the complete syntax and usage for the CREATE TABLE statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Assigning Column Constraints You can use the CREATE TABLE statement instead of the schema editor to place constraints on one or more columns in a table The following example creates a table called accounts and puts a unique constraint on the first column CREATE TABLE accounts a_name CHAR 12 UNIQUE CONSTRAINT acc_name a_code SERIAL Creating Databases and Tables 2 43 Creating an Index on a Table See the CREATE TABLE statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for detailed syntax Creating an Index on a Table The schema editor creates a nonclustered ascending index for the values in the associated database column To create a different type of index use the CREATE INDEX statement To modify a different type of index use the ALTER INDEX statement The following example creates a clustered index on the customer table which orders the table by zipcode CREATE CLUSTER INDEX c_clust_ix ON customer zipcode You can also use the ALTER FRAGMENT statement to attach and detach indexes as part of table fragmentation The CREATE INDEX ALTER INDEX and ALTER FRAGMENT statements are described in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Also see Index Name in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax and the discussion of indexing
137. call_type call_code ys c_cat sql The following command file creates the catalog table which is available only with INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server It contains a constraint aa which allows you to practice with cascading deletes by running the SQL statements in the alt_cat sql and del_stock sql command files on a database with logging CREATE TABLE catalog catalog_num SERIAL 10001 stock_num SMALLINT NOT NULL manu_code CHAR 3 NOT NULL cat_descr TEXT cat_picture BYTE cat_advert VARCHAR 255 65 PRIMARY KEY catalog_num FOREIGN KEY stock_num manu_code REFERENCES stock CONSTRAINT aa Ms Sample Command Files A 3 c_custom sql c_custom sql The following command file creates the CREATE TABLE customer Je c_index sql customer table c_items sql The following command file creates the CREATE TABLE items item_num SMALLI order_num INTEGE stock_num SMALLI anu_code CHAR 3 quantity SMALLI total_price MONEY U FOREIGN KEY order_num RE FOREIGN KEY stock_num ma stock_num manu_code de A 4 DB Access User Manual customer table customer_num SERIAL 101 fname CHAR 15 Tname CHAR 15 company CHAR 20 addressl CHAR 20 address2 CHAR 20 city CHAR 15 state CHAR 2 zipcode CHAR 5 phone CHAR 18 PRIMARY KEY customer_num The following command file creates an index on the zipcode column of the CREATE INDEX zip_ix ON custo
138. cates that the statement is complete TN NOT A branch below the main line indicates an optional path Any term on the main path is required unless a branch can circumvent it A loop indicates a path that you can repeat Punctuation along the top of the loop indicates the separator symbol for list items as in this example A A gate A ona path indicates that you can only use that path the indicated number of times even if it is part of a larger loop Here you can specify size no more than three times within this statement segment 2 of 2 Figure 1 shows how you read the command line diagram for setting the INFORMIXC environment variable Figure 1 An example command line diagram athname p To construct a correct command start at the top left with the command setenv Then follow the diagram to the right including the elements that you want The elements in the diagram are case sensitive To read the example command line diagram 1 Type the word setenv 2 Type the word INFORMIXC 3 Supply either a compiler name or pathname After you choose compiler or pathname you come to the terminator Your command is complete 4 Press ENTER to execute the command Introduction 13 Sample Code Conventions Sample Code Conventions Examples of SOL code occur throughout this manual Except where noted the code is not specific to any single Informix application development tool If only SQL s
139. cedure and the text appears Databases selects a different database about which to retrieve information Exit leaves the DATABASE INFO menu and returns you to the DATABASE menu 4 16 DB Access User Manual Retrieving Information on Dbspaces Retrieving Information on Dbspaces Select the dBspace option from the DATABASE INFO menu on INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server to retrieve information about the dbspaces in the current database as shown in Figure 4 15 Figure 4 15 DATABASE INFO aBspace Nls Procedures Databases Exit Display DBSPACE information for a database The DATABASE INFO menu stores7 dbserverl showing dbspaces Number of information for Name Chunks Created Mirror OnLine dbspace2 1 04 28 94 N Retrieving Information on Native Language Support Select the Nls option on the DATABASE INFO menu to display NLS information as shown in Figure 4 16 o Figure 4 16 DATABASE INFO stores7 dBspace Nis Procedures Databases Exit Display NLS information for a database The DATABASE INFO menu with stores7 dbserverl NLS information displayed for OnLine fr_FR 88591 Collating Sequence C CType If the current database supports NLS the screen displays the settings for the NLS collating sequence and Ctype Because the NLS language setting is not stored in the database it does not appear If you cannot determine the language setting from the collating sequence setting use the Session option described
140. changes as you move the highlight When you finish your changes to the table schema press RETURN DB Access displays the ALTER TABLE menu If your changes decrease the length of a column the MODIFY ANYWAY menu appears with a warning that you might lose data Select Yes if you want to continue with the change or select No Select the Exit option on the ALTER TABLE menu and then select Build new table on the EXIT menu to make the changes permanent DB Access makes the changes to the database table and returns you to the TABLE menu Creating Databases and Tables 2 31 Using the Alter Option 1 Dropping a Column from a Table You can remove any column from the table schema by using the Drop option on the ALTER TABLE menu Select the Alter option from the TABLE menu DB Access asks for the name of the table you want to change Select the table and the ALTER TABLE menu appears Use the Arrow keys to move the highlight to the column you want to delete Select the Drop option and DB Access displays the REMOVE menu with a message reminding you that this change will delete data when you select Build new table This is shown in Figure 2 31 REMOVE clients Yes No Figure 2 31 Deletes the highlighted column from the table Using menu options Page 1 of 1 mydata mynewdb Press CONTROL W for Help Column Name customer_num fname 1name company addressl address2 city state zipcode phone to alter a tab
141. char 15 char 15 char 20 char 15 char 2 char 5 define p_fname p_city char 15 define p_add char 20 define p_state char 2 define p_zip char 5 select fname addressl city state zipcode into p_fname p_add p_city p_state p_zip from customer where lname lastname return p_fname lastname p_add p_city p_state p_zip end procedure 4 18 DB Access User Manual Selecting a Different Database If the procedure text does not fit on one screen the DISPLAY menu appears with partial text as shown in the Figure 4 19 o Figure 4 19 DISPLAY Next Restart Exit Display the next page of results The DISPLAY menu with partial stored stores7 dbserverl procedure text displayed create procedure read_address lastname char 15 returning char 15 char 15 char 20 char 15 char 2 char 5 define p_fname p_city char 15 define p_add char 20 define p_state char 2 define p_zip char 5 Select the Next option to display the next page of text Select the Restart option to display text from the beginning Selecting a Different Database You can query on information on a different database by selecting the Databases option on the DATABASE INFO menu The SELECT DATABASE screen appears and you can select a database as described in Specifying a Dbspace on page 4 12 You can then query on the dbspaces NLS settings or stored procedures for the database as described in Displ
142. clauses queries on table data sample SELECT statement with simple join on two tables queries on table data sample SELECT statement with simple outer join on two tables queries on table data sample SELECT statement with outer join for simple join to a third table queries on table data sample SELECT statement with outer join for outer join to a third table queries on table data sample SELECT statement with outer join of each of two tables to a third table queries on table data sample SELECT statement with ORDER BY and WHERE clauses queries on table data sample SELECT statement with a subquery queries on table data sample SELECT statement with UNION on two tables updates the sports table The Query language Menu Option 3 17 Saving the Current SQL Statement See Appendix A in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference for the names structure and contents of all the tables in the stores7 database plus a map of the database Saving the Current SQL Statement When you have entered and successfully run an SQL statement you can save it in a command file for later use A command file is a system file that contains one or more SQL statements To save the current SOL statement s in a command file select the Save option on the SQL menu DB Access displays the SAVE screen and prompts you to enter a name for the command file as shown in Figure 3 12 Figure 3 12 save gt gt The SAVE f Enter the name you wa
143. creen as the current statements You can modify run edit or output these statements by choosing the appropriate menu option To leave the CHOOSE screen without selecting a command file press the Interrupt key which returns you to the SQL menu Sample SQL Command Files In addition to the command files you create if dbaccessdemo7 has been run in the current directory the screen lists SOL command files that are included with DB Access which are provided for practice with the stores7 demon stration database Additional practice command files that illustrate NLS features are available when you install a language supplement with the product and set the proper environment variables See the discussion of NLS concepts in the Introduction and in Setting Environment Variables for NLS or GLS Mode on page 1 8 Some files contain the SOL statements used to create the stores7 database and its tables Other files let you create an index create and drop a view and a stored procedure insert rows into and update a table query on the data in tables in various ways and otherwise familiarize yourself with SQL and relational database concepts The following alphabetical list contains the dbaccessdemo7 command files They are described in Appendix A Sample Command Files alt_cat sql alters the catalog table for cascading deletes OnLine only c_calls sql creates the cust_calls table c_cat sql creates the catalog table OnLine only
144. creen displays the default editor press RETURN to use that editor or enter another editor that is accepted by your system If this is a new SOL statement the screen is blank if this is a statement that you want to change or have called up with the Choose option the text of the SOL statement appears on the screen 3 10 DB Access User Manual Editing an SQL Statement Figure 3 6 shows the text of an incorrect SQL statement with an error message positioned below the error and displays the name of the temporary file that contains the statement CREATE TABLE mystock Figure 3 6 A temporary text stock_num SMALLINT editing file with SQL manu_code CHAR 3 description CHAR 15 statement text to be unit_price MONEY 6 corrected 201 A syntax error has occurred unit CHAR 4 unit_descr CHAR 15 PRIMARY KEY stock_num manu_code CONSTRAINT stock_man_ primary FOREIGN KEY manu_code REFERENCES manufact tmp rsqa02775 err 11 lines 132 characters Make your corrections to the text When you finish entering or modifying your SOL statement or statements exit as you normally do with that particular editor The SOL menu reappears with the Run option highlighted and the statement text appears in the bottom half of the screen Press RETURN to run the statement or select another menu option to save the statement in a command file or direct its output The Query language Menu Option 3 11 Redirecting Query
145. ction logging or create an ANSI compliant database When you exit the CREATE DATABASE menu you must confirm or discard your database as shown in Figure 2 12 n Figure 2 12 EXIT mydata reate new database Discard new database Creates a new database and returns to the Database Menu Using menu options to create a database the CREATE DATABASE confirmation screen 2 16 DB Access User Manual How to Select a Database Menu Press RETURN to create the database and return to the DATABASE menu which displays the name of the current database mydata and the current database server mynewdb on the fourth line This is shown in Figure 2 13 Figure 2 13 a ee Using menu options to create a database the DATABASE menu with database name How to Select a Database Menu To select a database choose the Database option on the main menu and then choose the Select option as shown in Figure 2 14 DATABASE Create Info Drop cLose Exit Figure 2 14 Select a database to work with Using menu options to select a database the DATABASE menu The SELECT DATABASE menu appears as shown in Figure 2 15 displaying a list of databases and database servers from which to choose Figure 2 15 Using menu options to select a database mnnera Press CTRL for Help the SELECT Rydatatmynewdb DATABASE menu SELECT DATABASE gt gt Select a database with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Retu
146. ctive Schema Editor to create a new table or define the fragmentation strategy of a table See Creating a Table or Defining a Fragmentation Strategy on page 5 49 respectively Alter lets you use the Interactive Schema Editor to modify a table or define or alter the fragmentation strategy of a table See Altering a Table on page 5 54 or Altering or Defining a Fragmentation Strategy on page 5 66 respectively Info retrieves and displays information about the structure and fragmentation strategy of a table See Displaying Table Infor mation on page 5 83 Drop deletes a table from the database See Dropping a Table on page 5 94 Exit exits the TABLE menu and returns you to the DB Access main menu If there is no current database when you select the Table option the SELECT DATABASE screen appears You can select a listed database as the current database or go to the SQL menu with the Interrupt key and create a database See Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option for information on selecting and creating databases or see Chapter 1 Working with DB Access for information about selecting a database from the command line when you invoke DB Access Creating a Table You use the schema editor to create a table when you use the Create option on the TABLE menu The schema editor appears in the lower portion of the screen You design the schema for a table by defining each column in the t
147. current SQL statements and displays the output on your terminal If there are errors If there are errors an error message will appear on the bottom of the screen and the Modify option will be highlighted Working with DB Access 1 35 Using a Text Editor The header of a HELP screen provides the following information m The first line lists your options m The second line briefly tells you about the highlighted option The following options let you page through the Help text or resume your previous actions m Select the Screen option to display the next screen of the Help text m Select the Resume option to return to the menu or screen you were using If there is more than one page of Help text the Screen option is highlighted Press RETURN to view the next screen To select the Resume option highlight it with the SPACEBAR or the right Arrow key and then press RETURN or press the R key If there is only one page of Help text the Resume option is highlighted and you need only press RETURN to resume your work See Appendix B for an illustration of how to read the syntax diagrams that appear when you request on line Help for creating modifying or editing an SQL statement Using a Text Editor You need to use a text editor to prepare and modify SQL command files when you select the Query language option on the main menu DB Access provides two ways to edit the text of SOL statements before you run them the SQL edi
148. d start with If you do not specify a starting point and press RETURN the default starting number for SERIAL values is 1 and new numbers are assigned automatically 2 22 DB Access User Manual Calling Up the Table Schema Type 101 to begin the numbering sequence at 101 and then press RETURN Indexing a Column Creating indexes for the columns in a table helps DB Access find information quickly However DB Access can find information in a database even if you do not index any columns If there is only one table in your database you probably do not need any indexes until you have entered several hundred rows of data into the table Too many indexes might slow down changes to the data As the size of your database increases and your database needs change you can always add and delete indexes A detailed discussion of indexes and indexing strategies appears in Chapter 3 of the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide After you define the data type of the column you can define an index for the column DB Access displays the ADD INDEX menu as shown in Figure 2 24 Figure 2 24 Using menu options to create a table Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help indexing a column ADD INDEX clients Yes Specifies that this column will NOT have an index Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial 101 E The ADD INDEX menu displays the following options Yes creates an index on the column No does not c
149. d to the server named motu on the host rangiroa The database server does not support NLS and there are no special server capabilities Figure 6 9 DB Access Query language Connection Database Table Session DB Access main Retrieve information about the current DB Access session menu with sample session information for the INFORMIX SE Connected to host rangiroa database server Figure 6 10 shows that DB Access is not connected to a database server or a host but it does support NLS The NLS settings are for the fr_FR 88591 collating sequence and C Ctype Figure 6 10 DB Access Query language Connection Database Table Exit DB Access main Retrieve information about the current DB Access session menu with sample session information for no database server Server No server Capabilities NLS NLS Capabilities and Attributes fr_FR 88591 Collating Sequence C CType To exit from the Session information screen select another option on the main menu The Connection and Session Menu Options 6 11 Sample Command Files This appendix shows the contents of the various command files that are available with DB Access These command files all have the extension sql when displayed from the command line but appear without the extension on the SQL CHOOSE menu Keywords in these command files are shown in uppercase letters to make the SQL statements easier to read Keywords in the actual command files are lowercase
150. dding 5 40 data validation 5 42 defining 5 40 dropping 5 42 information on 3 27 5 90 modifying 5 41 paging through 5 42 CHECK CONSTRAINTS menu 5 40 Choose option available command files 3 16 on the SQL menu 3 15 CHOOSE screen 3 15 CLOSE DATABASE statement 2 51 Closing a database four ways to do it 2 7 from a menu 4 21 using a menu option 2 38 using an SQL statement 2 51 with active transactions 4 22 6 8 with the Disconnect option 6 8 Collating sequence displaying for current session 6 11 Column adding default values 5 46 adding with the ALTER TABLE menu 2 45 5 58 adding with the schema editor 2 30 5 10 adding with the TABLE menu 2 30 5 10 allowing null values with the schema editor 2 24 5 18 data types described 5 15 data types for 5 13 data type adding 5 13 data type modifying 5 23 data validation of default values 5 48 default type current 5 46 dbservername 5 46 literal 5 46 null 5 46 sitename 5 46 today 5 46 user 5 46 default values for 3 28 2 DB Access User Manual defining 5 6 defining constraints for 2 27 5 34 defining with the schema editor 2 21 5 10 displaying data type and nulls with the Info option 3 21 5 86 displaying information with the Columns option 3 22 5 86 displaying next screen of definitions 5 28 dropping constraints 2 33 dropping default values 2 33 5 47 dropping from a table with the schema editor 2 32 5 27 5 61 dropping with SQL statements 2 46 dropping with t
151. dropping databases tables and indexes Selecting a different current database Entering deleting and updating data Querying a database Sending query results to a file or program Displaying information about one or more tables Renaming tables and columns Checking and repairing tables INFORMIX SE only Loading and unloading data to and from ASCII files Granting and revoking database and table privileges This chapter outlines the steps needed to create drop and close a database and to create modify and drop a table in that database using SOL statements It also describes how to use SQL to get information on the structure and contents of a table With DB Access you enter and run SQL statements through the SOL menu which appears when you select the Query language option from the DB Access main menu The SQL menu is shown in Figure 2 39 Figure 2 39 sor New Run Modify Use editor Output Choose Save Info Drop Exit Using SQL to work Enter new SOL statements using the SOL editor with databases and tables the SQL menu Details of how to create modify and run SOL statements are provided in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option See Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for information on the syntax and usage of all the SQL statements in this chapter 2 40 DB Access User Manual How To Create a Database SQL How To Create a Database SQL Issue the CREATE DATABASE statement to create
152. e This section provides an overview of the ways you can build and modify a table in a relational database Full details are provided in other chapters of this manual and in other publications as described in the following list Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option illustrates and describes how to use the options on the SQL menu which appears when you select the Query language option on the DB Access main menu Use this option to issue SOL statements that create alter and drop tables Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option illustrates and describes how to use the options on the TABLE menu which appears when you select the Table option on the DB Access main menu Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax contains the complete syntax and usage of all SOL statements such as CREATE TABLE ALTER TABLE DROP TABLE ALTER FRAGMENT and others which operate on a table Chapter 3 of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference discusses the data types that can be assigned to the columns in a table GLS data types are discussed in Chapter 3 of the Guide to GLS Functionality Creating a Table With DB Access you can create a table in the following ways Using the DB Access schema editor from the TABLE menu Running the SQL statement CREATE TABLE from the SQL menu Modifying a Table Modifying a Table You might need to make changes to the structure of an existing table or one you are creating You can do this in the f
153. e Chapter 3 of the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide Determining the Lock Mode When you select the Lock_mode option on the TABLE_OPTIONS menu DB Access displays the LOCK_MODE menu as shown in Figure 5 26 Figure 5 26 LOCK_MODE clients Page Row Exit The LOCK_MODE Locking is at page level This is the default menu Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help Column Name Type Length Index Nulls 5 32 DB Access User Manual Specifying Table Storage on INFORMIX SE The LOCK_MODE menu lets you choose the mode to use when the database locks the rows in a table The LOCK_MODE menu displays the following options Page specifies that a row can be locked by locking the entire page on which it resides Row specifies that rows can be locked individually Exit exits to the TABLE_OPTIONS menu Unless you specify row level locking before you exit the default Page is used One row of a table is the smallest object that you can lock A disk page contains one or more rows of a table In some cases performance is enhanced by locking a disk page rather than individual rows on the page You choose between locking by rows or by pages when you create a table Whenever OnLine needs to lock a row it locks either just the row itself or the entire page or pages that the row occupies depending on the lock mode established for the table For more information on locking see Chapter 7 of the Informix Guide to S
154. e SQL editor or a system editor The Table Menu Option 5 77 The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy The EDIT EXPRESSION menu has the following options New lets you enter a new expression using the SQL editor Modify lets you modify the current expression using the SQL editor Use editor lets you modify the current expression using a system editor Exit exits the EDIT EXPRESSION menu and returns to the EXPRESSION menu see The EXPRESSION Menu on page 5 52 You have the option of entering a new expression or modifying the current expression using either the SOL editor or the system editor Once you have defined or edited the expression using the SOL editor or a system editor you are asked to confirm the changes DB Access displays the CONFIRM CHANGES screen as shown in Figure 5 70 Figure 5 70 CONFIRM CHANGES dbspacel O SAVE DISCARD The CONFIRM nee eee CHANGES screen The default for the CONFIRM CHANGES screen is SAVE Press RETURN to save the edits to the expression Select DISCARD to discard the edits to the expression You return to the EXPRESSION menu See The EXPRESSION Menu on page 5 52 The ADD DEFINE ATTACH POSITION Menu When you exit the EDIT EXPRESSION menu the ADD DEFINE ATTACH POSITION menu appears as shown in Figure 5 71 ADD DEFINE ATTACH POSITION Before After None Exit ee Define a position for an attaching fragment before a dbspace ATTACH POSITION Page 1 of 1 newstor
155. e Table Menu Option This Info option retrieves information on the current database whereas the other Info option retrieves data on the tables in the current database Also you cannot use the SQL statement INFO to display information about the database The Database Menu Option 4 15 Displaying Database Information To display information about the current database select the Info option on the DATABASE menu Either highlight the option and press RETURN or press the I key DB Access displays the SELECT DATABASE screen as shown in Figure 4 5 on page 4 12 Select a database by typing its name or highlighting it with an Arrow key and pressing RETURN The DATABASE INFO menu appears showing the database name and database server name on the fourth line This menu differs for OnLine and SE shown in Figure 4 13 and Figure 4 14 respectively Figure 4 13 Ser o o id The DATABASE INFO menu for stores7 dbserverl displaying database information for OnLine Figure 4 14 DATABASE INFO INL Procedur Databases Exit Display NLS oip El ar o E a E stores7 dbserverl19 displaying database information for INFORMIX SE The DATABASE INFO menu displays the following options dBspace retrieves information about the dbspaces in the current database OnLine only Nis displays the settings of the LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE environment variable for the database when it is in NLS mode Procedures lists the procedures in the current database Select a pro
156. e item to a foreign key constraint or create a new check constraint unique constraint or default value Select the Exit option to return to the CONSTRAINTS menu Select Exit again to return to the ALTER TABLE or CREATE TABLE menu To build the modified table with the dropped or modified constraint s select Exit and then the Build new table option Altering a Fragmentation Strategy You can alter the fragmentation strategy for an existing table through the Table_options option on the ALTER TABLE menu From the TABLE_OPTIONS menu select the Storage option The STORAGE menu appears You can then select the Fragment option and an ALTER FRAGMENT menu appears for round robin expression or no fragmentation strategy depending on the current table o From the ALTER FRAGMENT menu for round robin fragmen tation strategy you can add or drop a dbspace display the next screen page of dbspaces for the strategy define a new fragmen tation strategy attach one or more tables to the current table or detach records from the current table and create a new table with those records a From the ALTER FRAGMENT menu for expression fragmentation strategy you can add a new expression to the strategy modify an existing strategy definition drop a highlighted expression display the next screen page of the strategy define a new fragmentation strategy attach one or more tables to the current table or detach records from the current tab
157. e not covered in the manuals or that notes have been modified since publication The file containing the Documentation Notes for the DB Access utility is called DBACCDOC_7 2 Release notes Describes feature differences from earlier versions of Informix products and how these differences might affect current prod ucts This file also contains information about any known prob lems and their workarounds The file containing the Release Notes for Version 7 2 of Informix database server products is called SERVERS_7 2 Machine notes Describes any special actions that are required to configure and use Informix products on your computer Machine notes are named for the product that is described For example the ma chine notes file for Version 7 2 of INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and INFORMIX SE database server are called ONLINE_7 2 and SE_7 2 respectively Please examine these files because they contain vital information about application and performance issues Related Reading For additional technical information on database management consult the following books The first book is an introductory text for readers who are new to database management while the second book is a more complex technical work for SQL programmers and database administrators m Database A Primer by C J Date Addison Wesley Publishing 1983 m An Introduction to Database Systems by C J Date Addison Wesley Publishing 1994 18 DB Access User Manual
158. e on the bottom of the screen indicating how many rows were retrieved The query results do not appear on the screen You can set the DBPRINT environment variable to specify a default printer 3 12 DB Access User Manual Sending Output to a File Sending Output to a File You can write query results to a new file or append the results to an existing file You can then use your operating system programs to edit copy rename or delete the file The New file Option If you want to create a new file to store query results select the New file option on the OUTPUT menu You then see the OUTPUT NEW FILE screen as shown in Figure 3 8 0 Figure 3 8 OUTPUT NEW FILE gt gt Enter the name you want to assign to the new file then press Return The OUTPUT NEW FILE screen stores7 dbserverl SELECT FROM customer Type a name for the file and press RETURN DB Access forwards the results of the query to that file and displays a message indicating how many rows were retrieved The query results do not appear on the screen Warning If you enter the name of an existing file this procedure overwrites the existing file with the query results The Append file Option If you want to add your query results to the end of an existing file without replacing its contents select the Append file option on the OUTPUT menu You then see the OUTPUT APPEND FILE screen as shown in Figure 3 9 Figure 3 9 OUTPUT APPEND FILE gt gt The OUT
159. ect a table in one of the following ways m Type the table name and press RETURN You must use this method and include the full pathname if you want information on a table that is not in the current database m Use the Arrow keys to highlight the table name you want and press RETURN The Table Menu Option 5 83 Displaying Table Information For example for the customer table type customer or highlight it with an Arrow key and press RETURN The INFO menu appears with customer in the top line as shown in Figure 5 78 and Figure 5 79 Figure 5 78 INFO customer Columns Indexes Privileges References Status The INFO menu for Display column names and data types for a table displaying table information first screen Figure 5 79 INFO customer cOnstraints triGgers Table Fragments Exit The INFO menu for Reference menu and primary unique check and defaults options displaying table information second screen The INFO menu displays the following options Columns lists all the columns in the specified table and displays their data type and whether they allow null values See The Columns Option on page 5 86 Indexes lists the name owner and type of each index for a specified table whether the index is clustered and the names of the columns that are indexed See The Indexes Option on page 5 86 Privileges lists the users who have access privileges for the specified table and whether they
160. elect the default Build new table or press the D key or move the cursor to highlight the Discard new table option with an Arrow key and press RETURN DB Access accordingly builds or discards the table and returns you to the TABLE menu Dropping a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu You can press the Interrupt key at any time to leave a MODIFY screen without making any changes Dropping a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu The following steps outline how to delete a column from a table schema 1 Position the highlight anywhere on the column that you want to drop 2 Select the Drop option on the ALTER TABLE menu Some or all of that column line is then highlighted on the screen DB Access displays the REMOVE menu as shown in Figure 5 49 o Figure 5 49 REMOVE clients y Yes No Deletes the highlighted column from the table The REMOVE menu Page 1 of 1 mydata mydbserv Press CONTROL W for Help Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial Unique No fname Char Yes iname Char Yes company Char The REMOVE menu displays the following options Yes deletes the column currently highlighted in the schema editor No does not delete the column currently highlighted in the schema editor The default is Yes If you decide that you do not want to drop the highlighted column press the N key or use the right Arrow key to highlight No and press RETURN DB Access drops the column and all its data if you exi
161. elect the default editor displayed in the first line of the USE EDITOR screen or type the name of a different editor that has been set for your system and then press RETURN Working with DB Access 1 39 Using a System Editor DB Access calls the editor you specify and creates a temporary file for your text You can then modify or enter new SQL statements and exit the text file following the standard rules for the system editor Select the Save option on the SQL menu to save your text file Select the Choose option to retrieve a saved text file that you want to edit or run The options on the SQL menu are illustrated and described in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option Tip If you are already familiar with DB Access you can skip Chapter 2 Creating UY Databases and Tables and go directly to the appropriate sections of Chapters 3 through 6 which describe the various options on the main menu 1 40 DB Access User Manual Creating Databases and Tables Working with a Database Selecting a Database Creating a Database Dropping a Database Closing a Database Getting Database Information Working with a Table Creating a Table Modifying a Table Dropping a Table Getting Table Information The DB Access Facilities Using the Interactive Schema Editor Using SQL Statements Using SQL with DB Access List of Available SOL Statements Method 1 Using the Menu Options How To Create a Database
162. elects the cuttle database in the octo directory on the squid database server squid octo cuttle Exiting the Screen To leave the SELECT DATABASE screen without selecting a database press the Interrupt key and you return to the DATABASE menu 4 8 DB Access User Manual CREATE DATABASE gt gt want to assign to the new database then press Return Enter the name you Creating a Database Creating a Database To create a new database instead of selecting an existing one select the Create option from the DATABASE menu The CREATE DATABASE screen appears as shown in Figure 4 3 Figure 4 3 The CREATE DATABASE screen Enter a name for the database you want to create and press RETURN You can assign any name as long as you follow these guidelines m The name you assign to the database can be from 1 to 18 characters long inclusive 1 to 10 characters inclusive on INFORMIX SE m The database name must begin with a letter or underscore _ The rest of the name can have any combination of letters numbers and underscores The database server does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters in database names Therefore moorea Moorea and MOOREA refer to the same database m Certain keywords might cause potential ambiguities or syntax errors when used to name a database table or column See the Identifier segment in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for a discussi
163. ements you can run only with INFORMIX SE Figure 2 7 RECOVER TABLE ROLLFORWARD DATABASE START DATABASE REPAIR TABLE DATABASE Select a database to work with DATABASE Select Create Info Drop cLose Exit Create a new database Method 1 Using the Menu Options Method 1 Using the Menu Options The easiest way to create a database or table is to select the Database or Table option respectively on the DB Access main menu Menus are provided at each step and you are prompted to enter each piece of necessary information HELP menus also are available This chapter walks you through the steps to create close and drop a database and to create modify and drop a table in that database using the DB Access menu system Full details of these menu options are provided in Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option and in Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option Tip Major topic headings in this section include the word Menu to indicate that they involve method one major headings for the section on method two will include the word SQL How To Create a Database Menu To create a database select the Database option on the main menu DB Access displays the DATABASE menu as shown in Figure 2 8 Select Create Info Drop cLose Exit Using Pcs isi a to create a database the DATABASE menu Press the C key or highlight the Create option using an Arrow key as shown in the screen in Figure 2 9 and press
164. enu The INFORMIX SE CREATE DATABASE Menu Specifying Logging on INFORMIX SE Creating an ANSI compliant Database on INFORMIX SE Exiting the INFORMIX SE CREATE DATABASE Menu Displaying Database Information Retrieving Information on Dbspaces Retrieving Information on Native Language Support Retrieving Information on Stored Procedures Selecting a Different Database Exiting the Screen Dropping a Database The DROP DATABASE Screen Confirming Your Decision to Drop a Database Exiting the Screen Closing a Database 4 5 4 6 4 6 4 8 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 12 4 12 4 12 4 13 4 13 4 14 4 14 4 15 4 15 4 17 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 19 4 20 4 20 4 21 4 21 4 21 4 2 DB Access User Manual his chapter describes how to use the features of the Database option on the DB Access main menu Select this option if you want to create a database select a database to work with drop an existing database or close the current database In addition you can select this option to retrieve and display such information about a database as available dbspaces text of stored procedures and Native Language Support NLS settings You need to specify a database server before you can specify a database Set the INFORMIXSERVER environment variable to select a default database server You must specify a database before you can do anything else with DB Access You specify a database in the following ways m When invokin
165. er c cust_calls u WHERE c customer_num u customer_num sel_ojoini sql The following example command file queries on table data using a simple outer join on two tables The use of the keyword OUTER in front of the cust_calls table makes it the subservient table An outer join causes the query to return information on all customers even if they do not make calls to cus tomer service All rows from the dominant customer table are retrieved and null values are assigned to corresponding rows from the subservient cust_calls table SELECT c customer_num c lname c company c phone u call_dtime u call_descr FROM customer c OUTER cust_calls u WHERE c customer_num u customer_num A 12 DB Access User Manual sel_ojoin2 sq sel_ojoin2 sql The following example command file queries on table data creating an outer join which is the result of a simple join to a third table This second type of outer join is called a nested simple join This query first performs a simple join on the orders and items tables retrieving information on all orders for items with a manu_code of KAR or SHM It then performs an outer join which combines this information with data from the dominant customer table An optional ORDER BY clause reorganizes the data SELECT c customer_num c lname o order_num i stock_num i manu_code i quantity FROM customer c OUTER orders o items 1 WHERE c customer_num o customer_num AND o order_num 1i order_nu
166. ers and underscores DB Access and the database servers make no distinction between uppercase and lowercase letters in column names Therefore kava Kava and KAVA refer to the same column Certain keywords might cause potential ambiguities or syntax errors when used to name a database table or column See the Identifier segment in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for a discussion of these keywords and available workarounds DB Access enters this name under Column Name displays the ADD TYPE screen and moves the highlight to the Type field Adding a Column to a Table Defining the Column Data Type Once you enter the column name DB Access displays the ADD TYPE menu This screen is where you can specify the data type for the new column as shown in Figure 5 7 4 A Figure 5 7 ADD TYPE clients Char Number Serial Date Money ate Time Interval Permits any combination of letters numbers and symbols The ADD TYPE menu for defining Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help column data types Column Name Type Length Index Nulls on OnLine customer_num E The ADD TYPE menu displays various data types depending on the database server and whether you are working in NLS mode Select the data type for the column by typing the first capitalized letter of the data type using either uppercase or lowercase letters or use the SPACEBAR to highlight it and then press RETURN Do not use the Arrow keys t
167. es mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help menu 5 78 DB Access User Manual The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy Use this menu to define an attaching position for the specified table that you are attaching to the current expression fragmentation strategy Highlight an option and press RETURN m Select the Before option to position the new attaching fragment before the specified dbspace The SELECT DBSPACE screen appears shown on page 5 74 prompting you to select a dbspace within the existing strategy You are then brought back to the ATTACH TABLES menu shown on page 5 76 with values shown for the Position and Dbspace fields m Select the After option to position the new attaching fragment after the selected dbspace The SELECT DBSPACE screen appears shown on page 5 74 prompting you to select a dbspace within the existing strategy You are then brought back to the ATTACH TABLES menu shown on page 5 76 with values shown for the Position and Dbspace fields m Select the None option if you want to attach the new fragment in the default position You are brought back to the ATTACH TABLES menu m Select the Exit option to leave the DEFINE ATTACH POSITION menu The DETACH DBSPACE Screen Select the detaCh option from the ALTER FRAGMENT expression fragmen tation strategy menu and the DETACH DBSPACE screen appears as shown in Figure 5 72 DETACH DBSPACE gt gt Figure 5 72 Select a dbspace with the Arrow Keys or en
168. ession Strategy The Add option on the EXPRESSION menu brings up the SELECT DBSPACE screen Dbspaces are listed and the default or current selection is highlighted as shown in Figure 5 43 SELECT DBSPACE gt gt Figure 5 43 Select a dbspace with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT DBSPACE screen for Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help expression strategy when creating a dbspace2 table dbspace3 The SELECT DBSPACE screen displays all the dbspaces associated with the current OnLine database server and prompts you to select the one you want for your expression fragmentation strategy If you select a dbspace that is already part of a strategy an error appears The EDIT EXPRESSION Menu After you select a dbspace the EDIT EXPRESSION menu appears as shown in Figure 5 44 allowing you to define an expression for the dbspace Figure 5 44 EDIT EXPRESSION new_acct Modify Use editor Exit The EDIT Enter a new expression which will determine where a record will be stored EXPRESSION menu Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help for defining and Dbspace Name Expression editing expressions dbspacel field1 lt 100 space fieldl gt 1 and fieldl lt dbspace3 remainder Use the EDIT EXPRESSION menu to define the expression to be used when determining where a record will be stored using the SQL editor or a system editor The Table Menu Option 5 53 Altering a Table The EDIT EXPRESSI
169. ex Nulls customer_num Serial Unique No fname Char Yes 1name Char Yes company Char Yes addressl Char Yes address2 Char Yes city Char Yes state Char Yes zipcode Char Yes phone Char Yes The EXIT menu has the following options m Build new table which builds the table m Discard new table which discards the table instructions Select the Build new table option and DB Access creates the table and returns you to the TABLE menu Specifying Column Constraints You can use the DB Access menu system to define constraints for columns in a table Select the Constraints option from the CREATE TABLE menu and the CONSTRAINTS menu appears as shown in Figure 2 29 Figure 2 29 Using menu options to specify column constraints the CONSTRAINTS menu CONSTRAINTS mytab Primary Foreign Check Unique Defaults Exit Define primary key constraint Creating Databases and Tables 2 27 Creating a Fragmented Table Choose from the CONSTRAINTS menu to define primary key and foreign key constraints column level and table level check constraints and unique constraints You can also use this menu to add or modify column default values See the discussion in Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option Creating a Fragmented Table You can use the DB Access menu system with the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server to create fragmented tables Select the Table_options option from the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE menu From the TABLE_OPTI
170. exits the STORAGE menu and returns you to the TABLE_OPTIONS menu The FRAGMENT Menu Select the Fragment option on the STORAGE menu to define the fragmen tation strategy for the table being created The FRAGMENT menu appears as shown in Figure 5 39 Figure 5 39 FRAGMENT new_acct Rouna_robin eXpression rOwids Exit The FRAGMENT Select and define a round robin fragmentation strategy menu for defining Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help fragmentation strategy The Table Menu Option 5 49 Defining a Fragmentation Strategy The FRAGMENT menu has the following options Round_robin lets you select and define a round robin strategy for fragmentation eXpression lets you select and define an expression strategy for fragmentation rOwids enables rowids for the table Exit exits the FRAGMENT menu and returns to the STORAGE menu Important Rows in nonfragmented tables can be accessed by a hidden column containing a unique rowid Rowid in this case refers to an integer that defines the physical location of a row However rows in fragmented tables are not assigned a rowid Thus if you want to access data in fragmented tables by rowid you must explicitly create a rowid column as is described in this chapter and in the discussion of rowids for the ALTER TABLE ALTER FRAGMENT and CREATE TABLE statements in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax If you attempt to reference a rowid in a fragmented table that does not contain
171. extension for command files 3 18 A 1 Fill factor specifying 2 23 5 18 FLOAT data type 5 14 Foreign key constraints adding 5 37 defining 5 37 dropping 5 39 enabling cascading deletes 5 38 information on 3 25 5 89 modifying 5 39 paging through 5 39 Fragment adding to a strategy in DB Access 5 71 ALTER FRAGMENT menu in DB Access 5 64 5 67 EXPRESSION menu in DB Access 5 52 FRAGMENT menu in DB Access 5 49 5 68 5 75 5 81 option on DB Access STORAGE menu 5 49 ROUND_ROBIN menu in DB Access 5 50 Fragmentation displaying information with the Fragments option 3 30 5 93 Fragmentation strategy ALTER FRAGMENT statement 2 48 ALTER TABLE statement 2 48 CREATE TABLE statement 2 43 creating a fragmented table witha menu 2 28 defining with DB Access FRAGMENT menu 5 82 expression in DB Access 5 72 initializing with DB Access FRAGMENT menu 5 81 modifying with a menu 2 34 no strategy menu in DB Access 5 80 round robin in DB Access 5 67 Fragmented table creating 2 28 2 43 modifying 2 34 2 48 H Help calling with CTRL W B 1 displaying from menu screen 1 33 displaying from text entry screen 1 35 how to read syntax diagrams B 1 in local language 1 10 Help menu displaying the next page of Help text 1 36 how to use 1 35 returning to the working menu or screen 1 36 Index 7 Host displaying session information on 6 10 How to use your terminal 1 11 Index allowing duplicate values 5 17 creating with the ADD
172. facilities let you perform the following actions m Creating and modifying tables in the database using the menus provided with the Interactive Schema Editor m Entering modifying and retrieving database information and modifying the structure of the database using SQL This section introduces these features Later sections of this chapter describe the steps for both methods of creating and modifying databases and tables Using the Interactive Schema Editor A database comprises one or more tables A table schema is essentially a blueprint that defines the structure columns of a table in a database Use the Interactive Schema Editor to create the schema for each table in a database Select the Table option on the DB Access main menu From this menu you can use the Interactive Schema Editor with the CREATE TABLE menu as shown in Figure 2 1 The various menu options and screens involved in creating and modifying a table schema are described in Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option Figure 2 1 CREATE TABLE customer Add Modify Drop Screen Table_options Constraints Exit The CREATE TABLE Adds columns to the table above the line with the highlight e i menu in the Page 1 of 1 mydata mynewdb Interactive Schema Column Name Type Length Index Nulls Editor OnLine HA 2 10 DB Access User Manual Using SQL Statements You build the schema for a table by adding columns to it For each column specify the name data
173. files that you can use for practice These example files are provided with DB Access when you run the script to install the demonstration database Appendix B illustrates how to read the syntax for SQL statements described on the DB Access on line Help screens Types of Users Types of Users This manual is written for all users of Informix products who use the DB Access utility to access modify and retrieve the information in a relational database With DB Access users can perform the following database management tasks Creating modifying and dropping databases Creating modifying and dropping fragmented or unfragmented tables Loading data from operating system files Running queries using an interactive query language Inserting deleting updating and querying on data in the database Creating and dropping privileges and indexes Obtaining information about the architecture of tables and databases Users do not need database management experience or familiarity with relational database concepts to use this manual However a knowledge of Structured Query Language SQL would be useful Informix SQL is described in detail in a separate set of manuals called the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial the Informix Guide to SQL Reference and the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Software Dependencies This manual assumes that you are using either INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Version 7 2 or INFORMIX SE Version 7 2 as your da
174. for the name of the table you want to change Select the table and the ALTER TABLE menu appears Use the Arrow keys to move the highlight to the location of the new column 2 Select the Add option As before enter the information needed to create one or more columns When you finish press the Interrupt key DB Access again displays the ALTER TABLE menu 2 30 DB Access User Manual 3 Using the Alter Option Select the Exit option Then select Build new table to make the table addition permanent DB Access makes the changes to the database table and returns you to the TABLE menu Modifying a Column in a Table Use the Alter option to change an existing column definition in the table schema You can change one or more parts of a column definition as described in the following list 1 Select the Alter option on the TABLE menu DB Access asks for the name of the table you want to change Select the table and the ALTER TABLE menu appears Use the Arrow keys to move the highlight to the part of the schema you want to change Select the Modify option DB Access displays the appropriate screen for the part of the schema you highlighted Make the desired changes by entering information on the menu that appears for each part of the column definition If you want to modify another part of the schema use the Arrow keys to move the highlight Make menu selections by using the SPACEBAR to highlight the desired option The screen
175. g Ed Smith Order sent yesterday we were waiting for goods from ANZ Next time will call with delay if necessary The Next option is highlighted Keep pressing RETURN until you see all the selected rows A message at the bottom of the last screen of information indicates the number of rows that are returned Select Restart at any time to display the results from the beginning Press RETURN to continue viewing the results or select Exit to return to the SQL menu If you exit before all the results are displayed a message at the bottom of the screen indicates that the query has been interrupted 3 8 DB Access User Manual Modifying an SQL Statement Modifying an SQL Statement When DB Access finds an error in an SQL statement you are trying to run the Modify option is highlighted on the SQL menu and the current statement text and error message are displayed as shown in Figure 3 5 Figure 3 5 soL New Run Use editor Output Choose Save Info Drop Exit The SQL menu with Modify the current SOL statements using the SOL editor SQL statement text stores7 dbserverl to be modified CREATE TABLE mystock stock_num SMALLINT manu_code CHAR 3 description CHAR 15 unit_price MONEY 6 unit CHAR 4 unit_descr CHAR 15 PRIMARY KEY stock_num manu_code CONSTRAINT stock_man_ primary FOREIGN KEY manu_code REFERENCES manufact 201 A syntax error has occurred Press RETURN and DB Access calls the SOL editor
176. g DB Access from the command line as described in Chapter 1 Working with DB Access m By running a statement on the SQL menu as described in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option m Through the DATABASE menu screens as described in this chapter You can either select an existing database or create one The database you work with is called the current database Important With INFORMIX SE a user cannot list or create databases with DB Access using a TCP connection if the current working directory does not have at least Execute permission for the user even though the user accessed the directory through the group ID You might need to add at least Execute and possibly Read and Write permissions to the directory This situation does not occur in pipe mode For amap of the DB Access menu hierarchy plus an overview of how to work with menu text entry and HELP screens refer to Chapter 1 Working with DB Access Turn to Chapter 2 Creating Databases and Tables for more detailed information on creating databases The Database Menu Option 4 3 Important You should note the following information when working with NLS When you open or connect to a database the LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE setting must be the same as that shown in the session information described in Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options If the settings do not match DB Access displays an error message and the proper se
177. g command to check for ANSI compliance when you alter the komodo table in the skink database dbaccess ansi skink ta komodo Enter the following command to check for ANSI compliance when you create a database dbaccess ansi dc terrapin If you include the ansi option or set the DBANSIWARN environment variable and access or create an ANSI database and if the SQL statement being executed generates a warning rather than an error DB Access displays the SQLSTATE value along with the warning This occurs only when DB Access is in line mode or reads from an sql input file it does not apply when DB Access is in interactive mode For more information on SQLSTATE and a list of values see the discussion of the GET DIAGNOSTICS statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax 1 22 DB Access User Manual Displaying Session Information For more information on ANSI compliant databases refer to Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference and Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial See Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for information on ANSI compliance in Informix SQL syntax Displaying Session Information You can invoke DB Access and display session information on the main menu dbaccess s S goes to the main menu and displays information about the current session This includes database server type the host computer whether the server supports NLS and N
178. ge Unknown terminal type This message means that the DB Access program does not recognize the type of terminal you are using DB Access might not be installed correctly or your TERM TERMCAP or TERMINFO environment variable could be set improperly Ask your system administrator for assistance or review Preparing to Use DB Access on page 1 6 If you do not include an option in the dbaccess command line you must use the menu options to select a database and move around the DB Access menu system The rest of this section describes command line options that you can use to perform certain operations without going through the main menu Working with DB Access 1 13 Invoking DB Access and Selecting a Database Invoking DB Access and Selecting a Database You can invoke DB Access display the main menu and select a database as the current database dbaccess database database specifies the name of the current database you want to use You can use the database option with other dbaccess command line options When you invoke DB Access from the command line you can include the name of an existing database and make it the current database For example if you want to make the skink database the current database enter the following command dbaccess skink This option invokes DB Access and displays the main menu where the database and database server name appear on the fourth line as shown in Figu
179. ge other than English you must also install one or more language supplements for the language s you want to use Installation instructions for the supplements are provided with their on line or printed Language Supplement Release Notes If you install a Language Supplement you have access to additional command files for practice with NLS With NLS functionality enabled you can collate data according to a specified locale specify different monetary formats and use the NCHAR and NVARCHAR data types in the Interactive Schema Editor In addition if you have installed a Language Supplement DB Access menus and screens error and warning messages and on line Help appear in that language GLS For more information on NLS and GLS see the Guide to GLS Functionality Finding Your Way in DB Access This section explains how to use your terminal and how to invoke and begin working with DB Access Before you can start working with DB Access be sure that the following criteria are true 1 Your computer is running 2 Your database server has been correctly installed on your system 3 The INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server is on line if you are using that database server 4 The operating system prompt appears on the screen 5 Your environment variables are properly set for DB Access 6 For NLS functionality you have already set the DBNLS and LANG environment variables and any additional NLS environment vari ables that are needed 7
180. gument is given such as q and when the final argument is a hyphen DB Access reads from the standard input stream It collects text from the stream and when it has a complete SQL statement indicated by a semicolon or by end of file it executes the statement The output of the statement is written to standard output where it can be redirected to disk or piped to another program Working with DB Access 1 25 Other Command Line Features Reading from an In line File You can supply one or more SQL statements through an in line shell script using the C Bourne or Korn shell facility for in line standard input files as shown in the following example dbaccess stores7 lt lt EOT select avg customer_num from customer where fname matches A G EOT Reading from a Pipe You can supply SQL statements through a pipe as shown in the following example echo select count from systables dbaccess stores7 Interactive Input through Standard Input When you do not supply a pipe or an in line file that is when the standard input stream stdin is the terminal DB Access reads SQL statements interac tively It prompts with a greater than symbol gt and reads a complete line until you enter a complete SQL statement indicated by a semicolon or when you press CTRL D for end of file as shown in the following example dbaccess gt database stores7 Database selected gt select count from systables c
181. gure 5 74 ALTER FRAGMENT new_acct Init Attach Exit Define a fragmentation eel The ALTER FRAGMENT menu Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help for no fragmentation strategy Use this ALTER FRAGMENT menu to alter or initialize a new fragmentation strategy for storing the data in a table 5 80 DB Access User Manual The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu No Fragmentation The ALTER FRAGMENT menu for no fragmentation strategy has the following options Init defines and initializes a new fragmentation strategy The FRAGMENT menu appears letting you define and initialize the fragmentation strategy for an existing table Attach defines a fragmentation strategy The FRAGMENT menu appears which allows you to attach one or more tables to the current table Exit exits the ALTER FRAGMENT menu and returns to the TABLE_OPTIONS menu E Important You can perform only one operation during an ALTER FRAGMENT session The FRAGMENT Menu Select the Init or Attach option from this ALTER FRAGMENT menu and the FRAGMENT menu appears The options on the FRAGMENT menu differ depending on which option you selected to invoke the menu Select the Init option on the ALTER FRAGMENT menu and the ALTER FRAGMENT INIT menu appears as shown in Figure 5 75 Figure 5 75 ALTER FRAGMENT INIT new_acet eXpression Dbspace rOwids Exit The ALTER Select d define a round robin fragmentation strategy A id a FRAGMENT INIT Page 1 of 1 newstores mydbserv Press C
182. gy appears The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Round robin Strategy on page 5 67 m Ifthe fragmentation strategy for a table is expression then the ALTER FRAGMENT menu for an expression strategy appears The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy on page 72 m If the table does not have a fragmentation strategy then the ALTER FRAGMENT menu for no strategy appears The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu No Fragmentation on page 5 80 and it can be applied to the current strategy only once For example you can add only one dbspace to a round robin strategy and you cannot delete a dbspace during the Important You can execute only one menu option in an ALTER FRAGMENT menu same ALTER TABLE session 5 66 DB Access User Manual The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Round robin Strategy The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Round robin Strategy For a round robin fragmentation strategy the ALTER FRAGMENT menu appears as shown in Figure 5 55 when you select the Fragment option on the STORAGE menu Figure 5 55 ALTER FRAGMENT new_acct Drop Screen Init aTtach detaCh Exit The ALTER Add one new dbspace to the end of the list FRAGMENT menu Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help for round_robin Dbspace Name fragmentation strategy dbspacel dbspace2 dbspace3 Use this ALTER FRAGMENT menu to alter the round robin fragmentation strategy for storing the data in a table The ALTER FRAGMENT menu for a round robin fragmentation strategy has the following
183. hapter 4 The Database Menu Option and Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options On the DB Access main menu select the Database option and the DATABASE menu appears as shown in Figure 2 36 Figure 2 36 Using menu options to close a database the DATABASE menu DATABASE Select Create Info Drop cLose Exit Select database to work with Next select the cLose option from the DATABASE menu by highlighting the option or press the L key and then press RETURN You get a message indicating that the current database is closed and the database name disap pears from the Help line You cannot close a database with transactions if there is an active transaction that is not committed or rolled back In this case you get the TRANSACTION menu as shown in Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option This menu asks you to either commit or roll back the active transaction You can also use the Disconnect option on the CONNECTION menu to disconnect from a database server and close the current database On the DB Access main menu select the Connection option and press RETURN to call up the CONNECTION menu as shown in Figure 2 37 Figure 2 37 Using menu options to close a database the CONNECTION menu CONNECTION Connect Disconnect Exit Connect to a database environment 2 38 DB Access User Manual DISCONNECT es No I want to disconnect from the current database environment
184. has the following options Add adds a unique constraint for the table and enters the constraint and column name Modify changes the unique constraint or column name Drop drops a unique constraint or column name Screen displays the next screen of unique constraints Exit leaves the UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS menu and returns you to the CONSTRAINTS menu The UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS Menu the Add Option Select the Add option and the schema editor adds a new line makes the Constraint Name the current field and displays the ADD CONSTRAINT NAME prompt If you press RETURN in this field a temporary constraint name is assigned and it exists until the table is built or discarded After you have added the Constraint Name the Column Name is the current field and the ADD COLUMN NAME prompt appears Enter the Column Name and press RETURN A new line is added and the Column Name is still the current field The Table Menu Option 5 43 Defining Constraints The UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS Menu the Modify Option The Modify option lets you modify either the Constraint Name or Column Name field If you modify the Constraint Name field the MODIFY CONSTRAINT NAME prompt appears if you modify the Column Name field the MODIFY COLUMN NAME prompt appears Important Existing unique constraints listed on the UNIQUE CONSTRAINTS menu are identified with an asterisk before the constraint name You cannot modify unique constraints after you create them This is
185. have the table level Select Update Insert Delete Index and Alter privileges See The Privileges Option on page 5 86 Unless your login is listed separately you have the privileges given for public a general category for all users If you want information about database level privileges you must use a SELECT statement within the SOL menu to access the sysusers system catalog table References lists the users who have the table level References privilege for the specified table and the names of the columns they can reference See The References Option on page 5 87 5 84 DB Access User Manual Displaying Table Information Status lists the table name the table owner the size of the row in number of bytes the number of rows in the table as of the last UPDATE STATISTICS statement the number of columns ina row and the date the table was created On INFORMIX SE it lists the name of the audit trail file if there is one See The Status Option on page 5 87 cOnstraints displays the reference menu and primary unique and check constraints as well as the default values for the columns in the specified table This involves using a series of menus See The cOnstraints Option on page 5 88 triGgers displays header and body information for a specified trigger See The triGgers Option on page 5 92 Table redisplays the INFO FOR TABLE menu so you can select a different table for examinati
186. he ALTER TABLE menu 2 32 5 61 indexing 5 17 index modifying 5 25 length modifying 5 24 length specifying for data types 5 16 modifying constraints 2 33 modifying default values 2 33 5 47 modifying the data type with the schema editor 5 23 modifying the index with the schema editor 5 25 modifying the length with the schema editor 5 24 modifying the name with the schema editor 5 22 modifying the nulls entry with the schema editor 5 26 modifying with the schema editor 2 31 5 59 name adding 5 11 name modifying 5 22 naming conventions 2 21 5 12 nulls modifying 5 26 paging through default values 5 47 removing from the schema 5 27 renaming with SQL statements 2 47 Command files choosing from the CHOOSE screen 3 15 echoing commands to the screen 1 20 executing from the command line 1 20 in the stores7 database 3 16 listed 3 16 modifying with an editor 1 36 3 10 rules for naming 3 18 saving 3 18 shown A 1 Command file using to connect to database server 1 28 Command line additional features 1 25 executing shell commands from standard input 1 27 interactive input through standard input 1 26 reading from standard input 1 25 syntax for invoking DB Access 1 12 using the ansi flag 2 12 Command line options checking SQL statements for ANSI compliance 1 22 displaying session information 1 23 displaying the main menu 1 13 displaying the version number 1 24 echoing commands and output to the sc
187. he INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide or the INFORMIX SE Administrator s Guide m The INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Archive and Backup Guide describes the archiving process and the tools and commands available for archiving your INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server databases and backing up logical logs m When you upgrade your current version of INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server refer to the Informix Migration Guide for information about the steps you need to take to move your databases to the new version m The INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide might also be useful for improving performance m You might find it convenient to use the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Quick Reference Guide for a summary of the ON Monitor menu options and their command line equivalents m You or whoever installs your Informix products should refer to the UNIX Products Installation Guide for your particular release to ensure that your Informix product is properly set up before you begin to Introduction 15 On Line Documentation GLS work with it A matrix depicting possible client server configura tions is included in the UNIX Products Installation Guide The following related Informix documents complement the information in this manual set m If you have never used Structured Query Language SQL read the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial It provides a tutorial on SQL as it is implemented by Informix products It a
188. he MODIFY TYPE menu displays various data types depending on which database server you use Select the data type for the column by typing the first capitalized letter of the data type using either uppercase or lowercase letters or use the SPACEBAR Do not use the Arrow keys DB Access changes this data type under Type and redisplays the CREATE TABLE screen so you can make additional changes There are restrictions on changing certain data types to certain other data types For a discussion of data type conversion see Chapter 3 in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference For information on assigning and changing database data types with the CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE statements see Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax and Chapter 9 in the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial The Table Menu Option 5 23 Modifying a Column in a Table Modifying the Column Length Move the highlight to an entry in the Length field of a column and select Modify DB Access displays the MODIFY LENGTH screen as shown in Figure 5 16 MODIFY LENGTH gt gt Figure 5 16 Enter column length RETURN adds it The MODIFY LENGTH screen Page 1 of 1 mydata mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial 101 Unique No fname Char Yes 1name Char Yes company Char Yes addressl Char Yes address2 Char Yes city Char Yes state Char Yes zipcode Char Yes phone Char Yes If you modify certain entries in
189. he default is Commit Press RETURN and DB Access commits the transaction s and closes the database m If you want to roll back the transaction s use an Arrow key to move the highlight to the Rollback option Press RETURN and DB Access rolls back the transaction s and closes the database Warning Select an option carefully You might commit transactions you do not want if you select Commit You will lose any new transactions if you select Rollback If you press the Interrupt key DB Access displays the DATABASE menu without committing or rolling back the transaction s Consider the following issues when connecting and disconnecting m When you connect to a new database environment without explicitly disconnecting from the current one DB Access performs an implicit disconnect and the database closes m When you connect to a database server and then close the database the database server remains connected m When you connect to a database server open a database and then close the database the database server remains connected m If you open a database and then try to connect to a database server DB Access performs an implicit disconnect and closes the database Only one connection is allowed you must disconnect from the database server associated with the open database or close the database before you can connect to another database server The Connection and Session Menu Options 6 9 Choosing the Session Option Choo
190. in Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options to display NLS attributes and capabilities as well as other settings for the current DB Access session The Database Menu Option 4 17 Retrieving Information on Stored Procedures If the current database does not support NLS the screen displays the following message Does not support NLS E Important You get an error message under the following conditions m Ifthe DBNLS environment variable is not set m If the LANG setting for the database does not match the DB Access LANG setting the connection fails if you try to open the database Retrieving Information on Stored Procedures Select the Procedures option on the DATABASE INFO menu to display procedure text from a selected procedure The SELECT PROCEDURE screen appears showing a list of procedures in the current database as shown in Figure 4 17 Figure 4 17 SELECT PROCEDURE gt gt Select a procedure with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT PROCEDURE screen stores7 dbserverl Press CTRL W for Help If the procedure is found and it fits on the DATABASE INFO menu the text appears on the screen as shown in Figure 4 18 1 Figure 4 18 DATABASE INFO read_address dBspace Nls Databases Exit Display procedure text for a selected procedure The DATABASE INFO menu with stores7 dbserverl stored procedure create procedure read_address lastname char 15 text displayed returning
191. ine Help DB Access provides on line Help files that walk you through each menu option To invoke the Help feature simply press CTRL W wherever you are in DB Access The notational conventions and rules governing SQL statement syntax shown in on line Help are illustrated in Appendix B Error Message Files Informix software products provide ASCII files that contain all of the Informix error messages and their corrective actions To read the error messages in the ASCII file Informix provides scripts that let you display error messages on the screen finderr or print formatted error messages rofferr See the Introduction to the Informix Error Messages manual for a detailed description of these scripts The optional Informix Messages and Corrections product provides PostScript files that contain the error messages and their corrective actions If you have installed this product you can print the PostScript files on a PostScript printer The PostScript error messages are distributed in a number of files of the format errmsg1 ps errmsg2 ps and so on These files are located in the INFORMIXDIR msg directory Introduction 17 Related Reading Release Notes Documentation Notes Machine Notes In addition to the Informix set of manuals the following on line files located in the INFORMIXDIR release en_us 0333 directory might supplement the information in this manual On Line File Purpose Documentation Describes features that ar
192. ing SQL Statement on page 3 15 saves the current SQL statements in a command file for later use You can retrieve this command file by selecting the Choose option on the SQL menu See Saving the Current SQL Statement on page 3 18 lets you retrieve information about the columns indexes access privileges reference privileges referential and check constraints primary key constraints triggers status and fragmentation strategy of a table See Displaying Table Infor mation on page 3 19 drops a command file from the database See Dropping an SQL Statement on page 3 30 exits the SOL menu and returns you to the DB Access main menu Within the Query language option you can enter any SQL statement that the database server supports The SOL statements available in Informix Version 7 2 products are listed in Chapter 2 Creating Databases and Tables For complete details of SOL statements and their syntax and usage see Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Entering a New SQL Statement If you select the Query language option on the DB Access main menu and you have not specified a database with which to work the SELECT DATABASE screen appears You can specify the current database or press the Interrupt key and go to the SQL menu to choose a command file containing an SQL statement where the database is specified See Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option for information on selecting
193. ing example adds the unique constraint u_name to the manu_name column in the manufact table ALTER TABLE manufact ADD CONSTRAINT UNIQUE manu_name CONSTRAINT u_name Existing values in the column or columns you select must be unique and the column or columns you select cannot have an ascending index The following example drops the existing constraint u_name from the manufact table ALTER TABLE manufact DROP CONSTRAINT u_name You must specify the name of the constraint that you want to drop If you do not remember the name of a constraint you can query the sysconstraints table in the system catalog See the ALTER TABLE statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for the exact syntax Creating Databases and Tables 2 47 Modifying Fragmentation Strategy Modifying Fragmentation Strategy You can use the ALTER FRAGMENT or ALTER TABLE statement to change the fragmentation strategy for a table The following is an example of how to make a single fragmented table from two or more nonfragmented tables with the ALTER FRAGMENT statement ALTER FRAGMENT ON TABLE cur_acct ATTACH curr_acct new_acct The following example alters a fragmented table to add a rowid column ALTER TABLE account ADD ROWIDS See the complete syntax and usage for the ALTER FRAGMENT and ALTER TABLE statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax How To Get Table Information SQL Issue the INFO statement to get informat
194. ing to a command file 3 18 SELECT 2 49 selecting the SAVE screen 3 18 sending output to a file 3 13 sending output to a printer 3 12 sending query results to a pipe 3 14 START DATABASE 2 41 syntax conventions in on line Help B 1 using 2 11 using with DB Access 2 12 what happens when there are errors 3 7 what you can do with them in DB Access 2 40 SQLRM environment variable 1 6 SQLRMDIR environment variable 1 6 SQLSTATE value displayed 1 22 Status displaying for a table 3 21 displaying information with the Status option 3 24 stdin for interactive input 1 26 Storage location for OnLine table 5 29 specifying for SE table 5 33 Storage option creating fragmented tables 2 28 sTorage option CREATE TABLE menu 5 10 Stored procedures displaying 4 18 SELECT PROCEDURE screen 4 18 stores7 database SQL command files 3 16 A 1 Syntax for on line Help B 1 System catalog 2 19 System editor adding check constraint values 5 41 how to use 1 39 System files for storing tables 2 29 System tables where they are stored 2 19 T Table adding a column with the ALTER TABLE menu 5 58 adding a column with the schema editor 2 30 5 10 allowing null values in a column with the schema editor 2 24 5 18 ATTACH TABLES menu in DB Access 5 70 attaching to an existing expression strategy 5 76 building the schema with the schema editor 2 21 5 8 check constraint information 3 27 5 90 column information 3 21 3 22 5 86
195. ins SQL statements and makes them current Save saves the current SQL statements in a file so you can use them again later Info displays information about tables in the current database Drop removes a file that contains SQL statements Exit returns to the DB Access main menu Select selects an existing database Create creates a new database Info retrieves information about a database Drop drops an existing database cLose closes the current database Exit returns to the DB Access main menu A h Connect connects to a database environment Disconnect disconnects from a database environment Exit returns to the DB Access main menu A h Create creates a new table Alter alters the structure of an existing table Info displays information about current database tables Drop drops a table from the database Exit returns to the DB Access main menu Working with DB Access 1 31 Using DB Access Menus and Screens Using DB Access Menus and Screens The DB Access menu system uses the following screens m A menu screen such as the DB Access main menu m A text entry screen m A series of HELP screens The following sections summarize the functionality of these screens Detailed information about the uses of the various DB Access menus and screens is provided in Chapters 2 through 6 Using Menu Screens The DB Access menu screen is a ring menu that provides you with a set of choices The
196. ins_table sel_ojoin4 c_index c_trig opt_disk sel_order c_items c_type sel_agg sel_sub c_manuf c_viewl sel_all sel_union c_orders c_view2 sel_group upd_table c_proc d_proc sel_join Use these command files with DB Access for practice with SQL and the stores7 database You can rerun the dbaccessdemo7 script whenever you want to refresh the stores7 database and its tables and command files alt_cat sql The following command file available only with INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server alters the catalog table It drops the existing constraint aa on the catalog table and adds a new constraint ab which specifies cascading deletes You can use this command file and then the del_stock sql command file for practice with cascading deletes on a database with logging ALTER TABLE catalog DROP CONSTRAINT aa ALTER TABLE catalog ADD CONSTRAINT FOREIGN KEY stock_num manu_code REFERENCES stock ON DELETE CASCADE CONSTRAINT ab A 2 DB Access User Manual c_calls sql c_calls sql The following command file creates the cust_calls table CREATE TABLE cust_calls customer_num INTEGER call_dtime DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE user_id CHAR 18 DEFAULT USER call_code CHAR 1 call_descr CHAR 240 res_dtime DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE res_descr CHAR 240 PRIMARY KEY customer_num call_dtime FOREIGN KEY customer_num REFERENCES customer customer_num FOREIGN KEY call_code REFERENCES
197. ion Drop drops the entire foreign key constraint or a referencing referenced column pair Screen displays the next page of referencing referenced column pairs Exit leaves the FOREIGN KEY menu and returns you to the CONSTRAINTS menu The FOREIGN KEY Menu the Add Option Select the Add option to add a foreign key constraint definition You can specify the constraint name referenced table and cascading deletes or you can add a referencing referenced column pair to the constraint The schema editor displays the ADD CONSTRAINT NAME prompt and the Constraint is the current field Enter a constraint name and press RETURN If you press RETURN in this field without entering a constraint name the database server assigns a temporary constraint name until you add the constraint The Table Menu Option 5 37 Defining Constraints The next current field for entry is Referencing Column The ADD COLUMN NAME prompt appears Enter the name of the referencing column and press RETURN to add it The next current field is Referenced Table The ADD REFERENCED TABLE prompt appears Enter the name of the referenced table and press RETURN The next field for entry is Referenced Column The ADD COLUMN NAME prompt appears Enter the name of the referenced column and press RETURN to add it When the CD Cascading Deletes field is the current field the ADD ENABLE CASCADING DELETES menu appears as shown in Figure 5 31 It lets you enable o
198. ion about the structure and characteristics of your new table Use various clauses in the INFO statement to display information about the columns indexes privileges and status of a table primary key foreign key check and unique constraints as well as default column values triggers and stored procedures This information is currently unavailable Important You must use the DB Access menu system to display information about through the SQL statement INFO The following example requests column information for the cust_calls table INFO COLUMNS FOR cust_calls The following example requests column information for the table bunyip customer in the stores7 database on the remote topend database server INFO COLUMNS FOR stores 7 topend bunyip customer 2 48 DB Access User Manual How To Get Table Information SQL The following example requests information on the fragmentation strategy for the new_accts table INFO FRAGMENTS FOR new_accts See the syntax and usage for the INFO statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Use the SELECT statement in DB Access to query on the data in one or more tables in a database You also can use SELECT to extract certain table infor mation from the relevant system catalog tables as described in Chapter 2 of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference The following example selects four columns from the cust_calls table and displays data for the specified user_id SELECT c
199. ions Round_robin lets you select and defines a round robin strategy for table fragmentation lets you select and defines an expression strategy for table fragmentation exits the FRAGMENT menu and returns to the ALTER FRAGMENT menu Displaying Table Information Displaying Table Information Use the Info option on the TABLE menu to display information about the columns indexes access privileges reference privileges constraints refer ential check or unique column default values triggers status and fragmentation strategy of a table The Info option is also available on the SOL menu as described in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option You can also use the SQL statement INFO to display many of the same kinds of table information See Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for details on the INFO statement Select the Info option on the TABLE menu and DB Access displays the INFO FOR TABLE screen as shown in Figure 5 77 Figure 5 77 INFO FOR TABLE gt gt Choose a table with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The INFO FOR TABLE screen customer orders This screen lists the names of tables that exist in the current database If you are not the owner of a table the table name is prefixed by the owner name as in june clients To leave the INFO FOR TABLE screen without requesting table information press the Interrupt key You return to the TABLE menu You can sel
200. ix Guide to SQL Reference How To Create a Table in the Database Menu After you create a database the next step is to create the tables you want in the database DB Access does not limit the number of tables in a database The limit is determined by the amount of disk space available on your computer The tables you create with DB Access are placed in the current database This chapter uses mydata as the current database and mynewdb as the current database server If mydata is not your current database use the options available with the DATABASE menu to select or create mydata or another current database The name of the current database and database server is displayed on the fourth line of the screen Important You cannot use a menu option to create a temporary table To create a temporary table you must use the appropriate syntax for the SQL statement CREATE TABLE within the SQL menu Creating Databases and Tables 2 19 Calling Up the Table Schema Calling Up the Table Schema To begin creating a table select the Table option on the DB Access main menu The TABLE menu appears as shown in Figure 2 18 with the Create option highlighted Figure 2 18 Using menu options to create a table the TABLE menu TABLE 1 Create Alter Info Drop Exit Create a new table Naming the New Table Press RETURN and the CREATE TABLE screen appears prompting you to name the new table as shown in Figure 2 19 Figure 2 1
201. l2 COTS All None The Query language Menu Option 3 23 The Status Option This display indicates the following table level references privileges m The user betty can reference columns col1 col2 and col3 of the specified table m The user wilma can reference all the columns in the table m The user public can not access any of the columns in the table The Status Option Figure 3 20 shows the kind of status information you see when you select the Status option for the cust_calls table on an INFORMIX SE database server Table Name cust_calls Figure 3 20 Owner velma Display of status Row Size 517 information Number of Rows 7 Number of Columns 7 Date Created 01 28 1994 Audit Trail File With INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server the Audit Trail File line does not appear The cOnstraints Option When you select the cOnstraints option from the INFO menu the CONSTRAINTS menu appears as shown in Figure 3 21 0 Figure 3 21 CONSTRAINTS mytab Primary Check Unique Defaults Exit Reference and referencing options The CONSTRAINTS menu 3 24 DB Access User Manual The cOnstraints Option You can select the Reference option for information on referential foreign key constraints associated with the parent table the Primary option for primary key constraints placed on columns in the chosen table the Check option for information on check constraints on columns in the chosen table the Unique option f
202. le dropping a column Type Length Index Nulls from a table Serial Unique No Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Char Yes Any data in this column will be lost when you select Exit Build 2 32 DB Access User Manual Select Yes from the REMOVE menu if you want to delete the column select No and the table is untouched If you select Yes DB Access removes the column definition from the screen and returns you to the ALTER TABLE menu Select Exit then select Build new table and DB Access drops the column from the table schema If you decide you do not want to remove the column select the Discard new table option and DB Access restores the table schema to its former state Using the Alter Option Modifying or Dropping a Column Constraint Tip You cannot modify an existing primary key foreign key check or unique constraint through the ALTER TABLE menu You can however use the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE menu to change a constraint definition before the table is created You can drop a foreign key primary key check or unique constraint or a column default with the Drop option on the respective constraints menu that you access through the cOnstraints option on either the ALTER TABLE or CREATE TABLE menu 1 Select the Alter or Create option from the TABLE menu 2 Select the cOnstraints option from the ALTER TABLE or from the CREATE TABLE menu 3 The CONSTRAI
203. le and create a new table with those records o From the ALTER FRAGMENT menu for no fragmentation strategy you can define and initialize a fragmentation strategy for an existing table or define a strategy and attach one or more tables to the current table How To Get Table Information Menu m From the TABLE_OPTIONS menu select the Rowids option The ALTER ROWIDS menu appears You can then choose to add or drop rowids for a fragmented table For details see the discussion in Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option How To Get Table Information Menu You can get information about the structure and characteristics of your new table through the following two menus m Select the Info option from the TABLE menu which appears when you select the Table option from the DB Access main menu This menu is described in Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option m Select the Info option from the SOL menu which appears when you select the Query language option from the DB Access main menu This menu is described in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option Each menu lets you request and display information about the columns indexes privileges status constraints referential primary key unique and check default column values triggers and fragmentation strategy for any table in a database for which you have the Connect privilege How to Drop a Table Menu This section outlines how to drop a table using the menu
204. located in the INFORMIXDIR bin directory The database name that you supply is the name given to the demonstration database If you do not supply a database name the name defaults to stores7 Use the following rules for naming your database m Names can have a maximum of 18 characters for INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server databases and a maximum of 10 characters for INFORMIX SE databases m The first character of a name must be a letter or an underscore _ m You can use letters characters and underscores _ for the rest of the name m DB Access makes no distinction between uppercase and lowercase letters m The database name must be unique When you run dbaccessdemo 7 you are as the creator of the database the owner and Database Administrator DBA of that database If you install your Informix database server according to the installation instructions the files that constitute the demonstration database are protected so that you cannot make any changes to the original database 6 DB Access User Manual Demonstration Database You can run the dbaccessdemo7 script again whenever you want to work with a fresh demonstration database The script prompts you when the creation of the database is complete and asks if you would like to copy the sample command files to the current directory Enter N if you have made changes to the sample files and do not want them replaced with the original versions Enter Y if you want to copy
205. lso describes the funda mental ideas and terminology for planning implementing and using a relational database m A companion volume to the Tutorial the Informix Guide to SQL Reference includes details of the Informix system catalog tables describes Informix and common environment variables that you should set and describes the column data types that Informix database servers support m An additional companion volume to the Reference the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax provides a detailed description of all the SQL statements supported by Informix products This guide also pro vides a detailed description of Stored Procedure Language SPL statements m The SQL Quick Syntax Guide contains syntax diagrams for all state ments and segments described in this manual m When errors occur you can look them up by number and learn their cause and solution in the Informix Error Messages manual If you pre fer you can look up the error messages in the on line message file described in Error Message Files in this Introduction and in the Introduction to the Informix Error Messages manual m The Guide to GLS Functionality provides information concerning Global Language Support features On Line Documentation Several different types of on line documentation are available m On line help m On line error messages m Release notes documentation notes and machine notes 16 DB Access User Manual On Line Documentation On L
206. m AND manu_code IN KAR SHM ORDER BY lname sel_ojoin3 sql The following example SELECT statement is the third type of outer join known as a nested outer join It queries on table data by creating an outer join which is the result of an outer join to a third table This query first performs an outer join on the orders and items tables retrieving information on all orders for items with a manu_code of KAR or SHM It then performs an outer join which combines this information with data from the dominant customer table This query preserves order numbers that the previous example eliminated returning rows for orders that do not contain items with either manufacturer code An optional ORDER BY clause reorganizes the data SELECT c customer_num Iname o order_num stock_num manu_code quantity FROM customer c OUTER orders o OUTER items 1 WHERE c customer_num o customer_num AND o order_num i order_num AND manu_code IN KAR SHM ORDER BY lname Sample Command Files A 13 sel_ojoin4 sql sel_ojoin4 sql The following example queries on table data using the fourth type of outer join This query shows an outer join which is the result of an outer join of each of two tables to a third table In this type of outer join join relationships are possible only between the dominant table and subservient tables This query individually joins the subservient tables orders and cust_calls to the dominant customer table bu
207. m length from 1 to 255 bytes and a minimum space from 0 to 255 bytes Others data types such as DATE do not require a length entry The highlight skips to the Index field leaving the Length field blank 5 16 DB Access User Manual Adding a Column to a Table Defining an Index for the Column After you define the column name and data type you can indicate whether you want an index on the column DB Access displays the ADD INDEX menu shown in Figure 5 9 for this purpose 0 Figure 5 9 ADD INDEX clients Yes No Specifies that this column will NOT have an index The ADD INDEX menu Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial 101 L The ADD INDEX menu displays the following options Yes creates an index on the column No does not create an index on the column The default is No Press RETURN or the N key and the highlight moves to the Nulls field leaving the Index field blank Press the Y key to select the Yes option DB Access then displays an ADD DUPLICATES screen and prompts you to indicate whether the index can allow duplicate values The default is Yes m Press RETURN or the Y key and the word Dups appears in the Index field m Press the N key and the word Unique appears in the Index field If you are using the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and select either the Y or N key the ADD FILL FACTOR PERCENTAGE screen appears as shown in Figure
208. menu screen header usually shows the following information m The top line of a menu screen lists your options One option is always highlighted and is the current option Screen examples in this manual illustrate a highlighted option by enclosing it in a box The current option appears on the screen in reverse video dark letters on a light background if your terminal can display reverse video otherwise it is surrounded by angle brackets lt gt When a menu screen is displayed the cursor is somewhere on this first line m The second line known as the message line briefly tells you what you can do if you select the highlighted option Each time you press the SPACEBAR or the left and right Arrow keys the highlight moves to the next option and the description changes If you cannot remember what an option does simply highlight it and read the description m The third line is usually blank unless the message line continues m The fourth line displays the name of the current database if one is selected and also reminds you that you can always Press CTRL W for Help 1 32 DB Access User Manual DATABASE Select database to Using Menu Screens The DATABASE menu shown in Figure 1 7 is an example of a menu screen Figure 1 7 A sample menu screen Create Info Drop cLose Exit work with Selecting an Option In Figure 1 7 the Select option is highlighted indicating that it is the current option Press R
209. mer zipcode items table T NOT NULL NOT NULL T CHECK quantity gt 1 8 RIMARY KEY item_num order_num FERENCES orders order_num _code REFERENCES stock c_manuf sql c_manuf sql The following command file creates the manufact table CREATE TABLE manufact manu_code CHAR 3 manu_name CHAR 15 lead_time INTERVAL DAY 3 TO DAY PRIMARY KEY manu_code JR c_orders sql The following command file creates the orders table CREATE TABLE orders order_num SERIAL 1001 order_date DATE customer_num INTEGER NOT NULL ship_instruct CHAR 40 backlog CHAR 1 po_num CHAR 10 ship_date DATE ship_weight DECIMAL 8 2 ship_charge MONEY 6 paid_date DATE PRIMARY KEY order_num FOREIGN KEY customer_num REFERENCES customer customer_num Y Sample Command Files A 5 c_proc sql C_proc sql The following command file creates a stored procedure It reads the full name and address of a customer and takes a last name as its only argument CREATE PROCEDURE read_address lastname CHAR 15 RETURNING CHAR 15 CHAR 15 CHAR 20 CHAR 15 CHAR 2 CHAR 5 DEFINE p_fname p_city CHAR 15 DEFINE p_add CHAR 20 DEFINE p_state CHAR 2 DEFINE p_zip CHAR 5 SELECT fname addressl city state zipcode INTO p_fname p_add p_city p_state p_zip FROM customer WHERE Iname lastname RETURN p_fname lastname p_add p_city p_state p_zip END PROCEDURE
210. mes appears To leave the INFO FOR TABLE screen without requesting table information press the Interrupt key and you return to the TABLE menu You can select a table in one of the following ways m Type the table name and press RETURN m Use the Arrow keys to highlight the name of the desired table and press RETURN For example for the customer table type customer or highlight it with an Arrow key and then press RETURN The INFO menu appears with customer in the top line as shown in Figure 3 14 and Figure 3 15 Figure 3 14 INFO customer Columns Indexes Privileges References Status Display column Ee and data types for a table dos menu i isplaying table stores7 dbserverl information first screen 0 Figure 3 15 INFO customer a triGgers Table Fragments Exit Reference menu and primary unique check and defaults option doc ae el isplaying table ES information second screen The number of menu options that appear on the first screen of the menu depends on the capabilities of your terminal 3 20 DB Access User Manual Displaying Table Information The INFO menu displays the following options Columns Indexes Privileges References Status cOnstraints triGgers Table Fragments Exit lists all the columns in the specified table and displays their data type and whether they allow null values See The Columns Option on page 3 22 lists the name owner and type of e
211. mn with the schema editor 2 23 5 17 lock mode for 5 32 modifying a column with the schema editor 2 31 5 21 modifying fragmented 2 34 modifying the column data type 5 23 modifying the column index 5 25 modifying the column length 5 24 modifying the column name 5 22 modifying the nulls entry 5 26 modifying with an SQL statement 2 44 naming a column with the schema editor 2 21 5 11 NEW TABLE screen in DB Access 5 72 options changing with the ALTER TABLE menu 5 62 primary key constraint information 3 26 5 90 privileges information 3 21 5 86 rebuilding the schema after changes 5 28 references information 3 21 5 87 removing a column from the schema 5 27 requesting information on a table on another server 3 22 5 85 schema displayed 2 27 schema building 5 19 SELECT ATTACHING TABLE screen for expression fragmentation 5 77 SELECT ATTACHING TABLE screen in DB Access 5 71 setting the extent sizes 5 29 setting the lock mode 5 29 specifying storage for 5 33 Index 13 status information 3 21 5 87 storage location for 5 30 stored in system file 2 29 stored in tblspace 2 29 temporary how to create 2 19 three ways to get information 2 9 three ways to modify 2 9 trigger information 3 21 5 92 two ways to create 2 8 two ways to drop 2 9 unique constraint information 3 27 5 91 where information is stored 2 29 TABLE menu available options 5 6 guidelines for using 5 6 schema editor 2 30 selecting from
212. n menu Connecting to a Database Environment To connect to an existing database server choose the Connect option from the CONNECTION menu If there is a current connection it is disconnected if there is a current database it is closed You can specify a user ID or a user ID and password for your connection 6 4 DB Access User Manual Connecting to a Database Environment DB Access displays a list of available database servers and prompts you to make a selection Select a database server and DB Access prompts you to enter a user name as shown in Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 USER NAME gt gt Enter the login name you want to use for this connection The USER NAME prompt screen cowry seahorse starfish m If you do not specify a user identifier on the USER NAME screen and simply press RETURN you see the standard SELECT DATABASE screen listing data bases on the chosen database server m If you enter the login name that you want DB Access to use when connecting to the target database server DB Access displays the PASSWORD screen as shown in Figure 6 3 Figure 6 3 PASSWORD gt gt Enter the password associated with the user identifier The PASSWORD prompt screen cowry seahorse starfish Enter on the PASSWORD screen a password associated with the user identifier or press RETURN if you do not want to enter a password For security reasons the password you enter on the screen is not displayed Tip If y
213. n on 3 25 5 88 specifying for columns 2 27 5 34 unique adding 5 43 unique defining 5 43 unique dropping 5 44 unique information on 3 27 5 91 unique modifying 5 44 unique paging through 5 44 CONSTRAINTS menu Check option 5 90 Defaults option 5 91 options on 3 24 5 34 5 88 Primary option 5 90 Reference option 3 25 5 88 shown 5 34 5 88 Unique option 5 91 Constraints option ALTER TABLE menu 5 56 CREATE TABLE menu 5 9 5 10 CONTROL key 1 11 Conventions on line Help B 1 CREATE DATABASE menu exiting 4 13 4 15 CREATE DATABASE screen differences between OnLine and SE 4 10 shown 2 16 CREATE INDEX statement 2 44 Create option TABLE menu 5 6 CREATE TABLE menu correcting mistakes 2 25 how to exit 2 27 5 10 leaving the menu 5 19 5 28 options 5 9 CREATE TABLE screen how to exit 5 10 selecting from the TABLE menu 5 7 Creating a database differences between OnLine and SE 4 10 from a menu 4 9 restrictions on naming 4 9 two ways to do it 2 7 using an SQL statement 2 41 using the menu options 2 15 where system information is stored 2 19 Creating a table adding a column 5 10 adding to the table schema 5 19 building the table schema 5 8 fragmented 2 28 restrictions on naming 5 8 two ways to do it 2 8 using an SQL statement 2 42 using the menu options 2 19 with the schema editor 5 6 Creating fragmented tables DB Access EDIT EXPRESSION menu 5 53 EXPRESSION menu 5 52 FRAGMENT menu 5 49 ROUND_ROBIN menu 5 50 SELECT
214. n on the TABLE menu DB Access displays the CREATE TABLE screen as shown in Figure 5 2 a Figure 5 2 CREATE TABLE gt gt Enter the table name you wish to create with the schema editor The CREATE TABLE screen The Table Menu Option 5 7 Naming the Table Naming the Table At the prompt type the name of the new table and press RETURN You can assign any name as long as you adhere to the following guidelines m The name you assign to the table can be from 1 to 18 characters inclusive m The table name must begin with a letter or underscore _ The rest of the name can be any combination of letters numbers and underscores DB Access and the database servers make no distinction between uppercase and lowercase letters in table names Therefore tahiti Tahiti and TAHITI refer to the same table m Certain keywords might cause potential ambiguities or syntax errors when used to name a database table or column See the Identifier segment in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for a discussion of these keywords and available workarounds m See the discussion of INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and INFORMIX SE database server differences in Differences Between OnLine and SE on page 5 9 for additional restrictions Building the Table Schema Once you name the new table DB Access displays the CREATE TABLE menu as shown in Figure 5 3 CREATE TABLE clients Modify Drop Screen Table_options Co
215. n set additional Informix environment variables for enhanced performance DB Access observes their settings m Set the DELIMIDENT environment variable if you want DB Access to automatically accept delimited identifiers in SQL statements This means that database object names consisting of alphabetic or non alphabetic characters can be placed within quotes and that strings in double quotes are treated as identifiers rather than strings m Setthe FET_BUF_SIZE environment variable to determine the size of the fetch buffer for data sent by the database server m Set the OPTCOMPIND environment variable to indicate a preferred join method and help the optimizer select the appropriate join method for parallel database queries m Set the PDOPRIORITY environment variable to dynamically control the priority level of parallel database queries You can set these environment variables at the system prompt in your profile Bourne shell or Korn shell file in your login or cshre C shell file or in an environment configuration file m If you set these environment variables at the system prompt you must reassign them every time you log on to the system m If you set these environment variables in your profile login or cshre file they are assigned automatically every time you log on to the system Important If you set or modify the environment variables in a file rather than on the command line log out and then log back on or sou
216. n this chapter m The Interactive Schema Editor ISED See Method 1 Using the Menu Options on page 2 15 m The Informix implementation of Structured Query Language SQL See Method 2 Using SQL on page 2 40 You can perform relational database management tasks with these facilities Follow the instructions in this chapter to learn both ways to perform the following actions Creating a database Creating a table in that database Modifying the new table Getting information on the structure of the new table Dropping the new table Dropping the new database Closing the current database Tip You should first become familiar with the screen and terminal concepts and menu hierarchy described in Chapter 1 Working with DB Access and make sure you are properly set up to use DB Access before you continue with this chapter If you do not need practice with DB Access skip this chapter Creating Databases and Tables 2 5 Working with a Database 2 6 DB Access User Manual Working with a Database This section provides an overview of the two methods for working with a database in DB Access Full details are provided in other chapters of this manual and in other publications as described in the following list Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option tells you how to use the options on the SQL menu which appears when you select the Query language option from the DB Access main menu Use this option to issue SQL st
217. nd file drops the view named custview which was created in c_view1 sql DROP VIEW custview del_stock sql The following command file deletes rows from the stock table where the stock number is 102 This delete will cascade to the catalog table although the related manufacturer codes will remain in the manufact table The del_stock sql command file is available only with INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and can be used following the alt_cat sql command file for practice with cascading deletes on a database with logging DELETE FROM stock WHERE stock_num 102 After running the SQL statements in the alt_cat sql and del_stock sql command files issue the following query on the catalog table to verify that the rows were deleted SELECT FROM catalog WHERE stock_num 102 The stores7 database has been changed You might want to rerun the dbaccessdemo7 script to rebuild the original database Sample Command Files A 9 ins_table sql ins_table sql The following command file inserts one row into the sports table that was created with the c_table sql command file This is available only with INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server INSERT INTO sports VALUES 0 18 PARKR Parker Products 503 555 1212 Heavy weight cotton canvas gi designed for aikido or judo but suitable for karate Quilted top with side ties drawstring waist on pants White with white belt Pre washed for minimum shrinkage Sizes 3 6 opt_disk sql
218. new table to the fragmentation strategy TABLES menu for Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help round robin Table Name fragmentation strategy cur_acct myacct This menu allows you to attach one or more tables to an existing round robin fragmentation strategy The resulting new fragment or fragments will be positioned at the end of the fragmentation strategy The ATTACH TABLES menu has the following options Add lets you select a table or tables to attach to the current fragmentation strategy The SELECT ATTACHING TABLE screen appears Modify lets you modify an existing attaching table strategy definition Drop deletes the highlighted attaching table from the existing list of tables for the strategy It does not drop the table from the OnLine database server Screen pages to the next screen page of attaching tables for the fragmentation strategy Exit exits the ATTACH TABLES menu and returns you to the ALTER FRAGMENT menu 5 70 DB Access User Manual The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Round robin Strategy The SELECT ATTACHING TABLE Menu Select the Add option on the ATTACH TABLES menu for a round robin fragmentation strategy The SELECT ATTACHING TABLE menu appears as shown in Figure 5 60 T Figure 5 60 SELECT ATTACHING TABLE gt gt Select a table with the Arrow Keys or enter the name then press Return The SELECT ATTACHING TABLE menu for round robin fragmentation Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help
219. ng a Database If you select the cLose option when there is no database name on the Help line DB Access displays an error message If you try to close a database with transactions and you have begun a transaction but not committed it or rolled it back you see the TRANSACTION menu as shown in Figure 4 22 Figure 4 22 TRANSACTION Rollback The TRANSACTION Commit the current transaction menu for databases with transactions The TRANSACTION menu ensures that you either commit or roll back an active transaction before you close the current database The following list shows the two menu options m The default is Commit Press the Y key or RETURN and DB Access commits the transaction s and closes the database m If you want to roll back the transaction s use an Arrow key to move the highlight to the Rollback option Press RETURN and DB Access rolls back the transaction s and closes the database Warning Select an option carefully You might commit transactions you do not want if you select Commit and you will lose any new transactions if you select Rollback If you press the Interrupt key DB Access displays the DATABASE menu without committing or rolling back the transaction s The TRANSACTION menu also appears whenever you attempt to open a new database or try to leave the DB Access menu system without first terminating a transaction These are the only other instances when you can access the TRANSACTION menu from
220. ng the column data type 5 23 changing the column index 5 25 changing the column length 5 24 changing the column name 5 22 changing the nulls entry 5 26 dropping a column with the schema editor 2 32 three ways to do it 2 9 Index 9 using an SQL statement 2 44 using the Alter option 2 30 using the various menu options 2 29 MONEY data type 5 14 N Name adding column 5 11 modifying column 5 22 Naming conventions columns 2 21 database 2 16 for saving a command file 3 18 restrictions 5 12 Native Language Support and order of command files listed 3 15 3 31 and order of database names 4 20 and order of database names listed on screen 4 6 code sets for database operations 6 3 code sets for distributed databases 4 4 command files for A 1 data types for character columns 5 13 database and non NLS server 4 4 databases and servers 4 10 displaying information on 4 17 6 10 displaying language collation ctype 6 11 errors when connecting to a database 4 4 6 3 errors when opening a database 4 4 6 3 sample command file shown 5 20 NCHAR data type and NLS 1 10 5 13 New option on SQL menu 3 5 Next_size option TABLE OPTIONS menu 5 29 5 63 NLS See Native Language Support 10 DB Access User Manual Null values allowing with the schema editor 2 24 default for column 5 46 modifying column 5 26 specifying with the ADD NULLS screen 5 18 NVARCHAR data type and NLS 1 10 5 15 O On line Help how to read B 1
221. nstraints Exit The ae Adds columns to the table above the line with the highlight menu with OnLine Page 1 of 1 mydata mydbserv Column Name Type Length Index Nulls 5 8 DB Access User Manual Differences Between OnLine and SE The CREATE TABLE menu displays the following options with the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Add adds a new column to the table Modify modifies the structure of an existing column Drop drops an existing column from the table Screen scrolls down the screen and displays new text Table_options sets the storage dbspace or fragment extent sizes and lock mode for the table Use this option to create or alter a fragmented table Constraints defines and displays primary key foreign key check and unique constraints as well as default values for columns in a table Exit exits the CREATE TABLE menu and returns you to the TABLE menu Important The CREATE TABLE menu and its submenus behave differently than most DB Access menus You cannot use the Arrow keys to move the cursor between menu options because the Arrow keys control cursor movement in the schema editor You must use the SPACEBAR to move between menu options You can also use the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE statement to create or modify a table See Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option for information on entering SQL statements See Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for a discussion of ALTER TABLE
222. nstraints defines and displays primary key foreign key check and unique constraints as well as default values for columns in a table Exit exits the ALTER TABLE menu and returns you to the TABLE menu Important The ALTER TABLE menu and its submenus behave differently than most DB Access menus You cannot use the Arrow keys to move the cursor among menu options because the Arrow keys control cursor movement in the schema editor You must use the SPACEBAR to move among menu options The ALTER TABLE options work the same as their counterparts in the CREATE TABLE menu except for the following aspects m You cannot change the initial extent size This extent is set when you create the table m You cannot alter a primary key foreign key check or unique constraint once it is created m You can add new foreign key check or unique constraints but not new primary key constraints You also can use the ALTER TABLE statement to modify a table For details see Chapter 2 Creating Databases and Tables in this manual as well as Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax 5 56 DB Access User Manual Differences Between OnLine and SE Differences Between OnLine and SE Figure 5 48 shows how the ALTER TABLE menu appears if you use INFORMIX SE 0 Figure 5 48 ALTER TABLE clients Add Modify Drop Screen Constraints Exit Adds columns to the table above the line with the highlight The ALTER TABLE menu with Page 1
223. nt to assign to the command file e i screen tor saving results in a command file SELECT num ro nom pr nom FROM abonn s ORDER BY nom Enter a name for the command file containing the SQL statement or statements and press RETURN The example shown is in the file sel_nls1 which is provided with the language supplements for NLS That name appears on the SAVE screen Command file names can be from 1 to 10 characters inclusive The first character must be a letter but you can use letters numbers and underscores _ for the rest of the name You can use uppercase and lowercase letters in the name However remember that UNIX systems are case sensitive The file ords1 is not the same as Ords1 or ORDS1 DB Access stores the statements in a file using the name you assign and the extension sql For example a statement you name custl is stored in a command file named cust1 sql It appears as cust1 on the CHOOSE screen but appears as cust1 sql if you list the directory files from the command line You can retrieve the saved statements with the Choose option on the SQL menu 3 18 DB Access User Manual Displaying Table Information To leave the SAVE screen without assigning a name to a command file press the Interrupt key and you return to the SOL menu Displaying Table Information Use the Info option on the SOL menu to display information about the columns indexes access privileges reference privileges constraint
224. nter the following command dbaccessdemo7 dbname dbspace dbspacename You can specify all of the options in one command as shown in the following command dbaccessdemo7 log dbname dbspace dbspacename If you are using INFORMIX SE a subdirectory called dbname dbs is created in your current directory and the database files associated with stores7 are placed there You will see both data dat and index idx files in the dbname dbs directory If you specify a dbspace name it is ignored To use the database and the command files that have been copied to your directory you must have UNIX read and execute permissions for each directory in the pathname of the directory from which you ran the dbaccessdemo7 script Check with your system adminis trator for more information about operating system file and directory permissions UNIX permissions are discussed in the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide and the INFORMIX SE Administrator s Guide To give someone else the permissions to access the command files in your directory use the UNIX chmod command To give someone else access to the database that you have created grant them the appropriate privileges using the GRANT statement To revoke privileges use the REVOKE statement The GRANT and REVOKE statements are described in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax New Features of This Product New Features of This Product The Introduction to each Version 7
225. nterrupt key to get back to the CONSTRAINTS menu Select Exit to return to the INFO menu Select the referenceD option to display tables and the columns that have foreign keys that reference the current table Figure 3 24 is an example of a possible display 0 Figure 3 24 REFERENCE myaccts Referencing referenceD Exit Display columns which have foreign keys which reference this table The REFERENCE menu with accounts referenced Constraint Name Referenced Column Referencing Table Referencing Column information E107 13 acc_num sub_accounts ref_acc acc_type ref_type The foreign key information shown on this menu includes the constraint name the referenced columns of the table the referencing table and its columns and whether cascading deletes are enabled After a constraint has been displayed press the Interrupt key to get back to the CONSTRAINTS menu Select Exit to return to the INFO menu Selecting the Primary Option Select the Primary option to display the primary key constraints affecting columns in the current table Figure 3 25 is an example of a possible display Figure 3 25 CONSTRAINTS mytab References Primary Check Unique Defaults Exit The NBAT Display primary key constraint menu with primary key constraint Constraint Name Column Name information constraint1 column1 column2 3 26 DB Access User Manual The cOnstraints Option Selecting the Check Option Select the Check option
226. nu and Submenu Option Sample DB Access Command Line Commands The following command takes you to the Connect option on the CONNECTION menu from which you can select a current database server and database dbaccess cc The following sample command takes you to the Drop option on the DATABASE menu which lets you drop a database dbaccess dd The following sample command takes you to the Nls option on the DATABASE INFO menu which displays information about NLS for the skink database dbaccess skink din The following sample command takes you to the Choose option on the SQL menu and selects the scales sql command file in the skink database dbaccess skink qc scales The following sample command takes you to the Info option on the SQL menu and displays fragmentation strategy information for the komodo table in the skink database dbaccess skink qif komodo The following sample command takes you to the Create option on the TABLE menu where you can use the schema editor to create a table in the skink database dbaccess skink tc The following sample command takes you to the INFO menu on the TABLE menu and displays the columns in the komodo table in the skink database dbaccess skink tic komodo Working with DB Access 1 19 Executing a Command File Executing a Command File When you invoke DB Access from the command line you can specify the current database and execute a file containing one or more SQL statements
227. o create a table change or drop an existing table or get information about a table Use this option to define or redefine the fragmentation strategy for a table To perform table management tasks you can either enter an SQL statement as described in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option or select an option from the TABLE menu This chapter discusses the second method which uses the DB Access Interactive Schema Editor See Using the Interactive Schema Editor on page 2 10 You must have a current database before you can work with database tables See Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option for details about creating a database using SQL or see Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option for a discussion of the Database option on the DB Access main menu Also see Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options about connecting to a database environment For a map of the main menu plus an overview about working with menu text entry and HELP screens refer to Chapter 1 Working with DB Access Selecting the TABLE Menu To call up the TABLE menu from the DB Access main menu press the T key or highlight the Table option and press RETURN Figure 5 1 shows the TABLE menu Figure 5 1 TABLE Create Alter Info Drop Exit The TABLE menu Create a new table The Table Menu Option 5 5 Creating a Table The TABLE menu displays the following options Create lets you use the Intera
228. o move to your choice m n NLS mode if you press the C key or highlight Char and press RETURN you see a submenu with two options Char press the C key to select and Nchar press the N key to select Similarly when you press the V key or highlight Varchar on the Variable length submenu available on OnLine and press RETURN you see a submenu that lists two options Varchar press the V key to select and Nvarchar press the N key to select m Innon NLS mode you do not see these submenus The following list shows an overview of all the data types that you can assign from the ADD TYPE screen Some of these data types require that you enter additional information this is discussed in Specifying the Column Length or Other Parameters on page 5 16 Char CHAR data type also known as CHARACTER stores any string of letters nambers and other printable characters Nchar NCHAR data type for national character stores any string of letters numbers and other printable national characters NLS mode only The Table Menu Option 5 13 Adding a Column to a Table Number Serial Date Money Datetime Interval Variable length 5 14 DB Access User Manual Any of the following data types INTEGER data type also known as INT stores whole numbers that range from 2 147 483 647 to 2 147 483 647 SMALLINT data type stores small whole numbers that range from 32 767 to 32 767 DECIMAL data type also known as
229. o order_num SUM i total_price price paid_date order_date span FROM orders o items i WHERE o order_date gt 01 01 90 AND o customer_num gt 110 AND o order_num 71 order_num GROUP BY 1 3 HAVING COUNT lt 5 ORDER BY 3 INTO TEMP temptabl sel_ group sql The following example command file includes the GROUP BY and HAVING clauses The HAVING clause usually complements a GROUP BY clause by applying one or more qualifying conditions to groups after they are formed which is similar to the way the WHERE clause qualifies individual rows One advantage to using a HAVING clause is that you can include aggregates in the search condition you cannot include aggregates in the search condition of a WHERE clause Each HAVING condition compares one column or aggregate expression of the group with another aggregate expression of the group or with a constant You can use HAVING to place conditions on both column values and aggregate values in the group list SELECT order_num COUNT number AVG total_price average FROM items GROUP BY order_num HAVING COUNT gt 2 Sample Command Files A 11 sel_join sql sel_join sql The following example command file queries on table data with a simple join on the customer and cust_calls tables This query returns only those rows that show the customer has made a call to customer service SELECT c customer_num c Ilname c company c phone u call_dtime u call_descr FROM custom
230. of choosing a menu option The screen header usually shows the following information m The top line of a text entry screen displays the screen name followed by double angle brackets gt gt and the cursor m The second line briefly tells you what to do on the text entry screen m The third line is blank m The fourth line displays the name of the current database if one has been selected and database server as well as the following message Press CTRL W for Help The SELECT DATABASE screen shown in Figure 1 8 is an example of a text entry screen It appears when you choose the Select option on the DATABASE menu Figure 1 8 SELECT DATABASE gt gt A sample text entry Select a database with the Arrow keys or enter a name then press Return screen mydata dbserverl stores7 dbserverl Entering Text on the Screen You might be required to enter text in the first line of the screen header or below the broken line depending on the operation Whatever you type in the header of a text entry screen appears after the double angle brackets gt gt at the top of the screen Press RETURN when you finish typing and DB Access displays the next screen or takes other appro priate action The SELECT DATABASE screen and some other screens give you the option of selecting an item from a list on the lower part of the screen instead of typing your selection Use the Arrow keys to highlight the item you want and then press RET
231. og Mode_ansi creates an ANSI compliant database with unbuffered transaction logging Exit exits the LOG menu and returns you to the CREATE DATABASE menu Exiting the OnLine CREATE DATABASE Menu When you exit the CREATE DATABASE menu you must confirm or discard the new database as shown in Figure 4 7 0 Figure 4 7 EXIT personnel Create new database Discard new database Creates a new database and returns to the Database Menu The CREATE DATABASE confirmation screen The default is Create new database Press RETURN to create a database with the specified parameters make it the current database and return to the DATABASE menu If you do not want to create the new database press the D key or use the right Arrow key to move the cursor to the Discard new database option and press RETURN DB Access does not create a new database If you exit without specifying a value for dbspace or logging the default s apply to the database The INFORMIX SE CREATE DATABASE Menu Once you name the new database you see the CREATE DATABASE menu It differs for OnLine and SE The SE menu is shown in Figure 4 8 Figure 4 8 CREATE DATABASE personnel Lo Mode_ansi Exit Activate or ta op Beal Loa The CREATE DATABASE menu for INFORMIX SE The Database Menu Option 4 13 The INFORMIX SE CREATE DATABASE Menu With INFORMIX SE you can activate or deactivate transaction logging or create an ANSI compliant database that has un
232. oing to a Submenu and Submenu Option DATABASE Menu Options chooses the Create option on the DATABASE menu chooses the Drop option on the DATABASE menu chooses the Info option on the DATABASE menu With this option you can add another letter as follows to go to the next menu level and view dib dbspaces information for the current database OnLine only din NLS information for the current database dip stored procedures in the current database chooses the cLose option on the DATABASE menu chooses the Select option on the DATABASE menu SQL Menu Options chooses the Choose option on the SQL menu chooses the Drop option on the SQL menu chooses the Info option on the SQL menu With this option you can add another letter as shown in the following list and specify a table to go to the next menu level and view qic columns in the table qif information on fragmentation strategy for the table qig information on triggers in the table qii indexes on the table qio table constraints qip access privileges on the table qir table level references privilege on the table qis table status information chooses the Modify option on the SQL menu chooses the New option on the SQL menu chooses the Save option on the SQL menu chooses the Use editor option on the SQL menu Working with DB Access 1 17 Going to a Submenu and Submenu Option TABLE Menu Options ta chooses the Alter option on the TABLE menu tc cho
233. ollowing example CREATE SYNONYM synonym name means you must enter the keywords CREATE SYNONYM or create synonym without adding or deleting spaces or letters abc Substitute a value for any term that appears in low ercase letters In the previous example you should substitute a value for synonym name Enter any parentheses as shown They are part of the syntax of an SQL statement and are not special symbols B 2 DB Access User Manual Do not enter brackets as part of a statement They surround any part of a statement that is optional as shown in the following example CREATE LTEMP TABLE indicates that you should enter either CREATE TABLE or CREATE TEMP TABLE The vertical bar indicates a choice among several options For example VANILLA CHOCOLATE MINT STRAWBERRY means that you can enter either VANILLA CHOCOLATE or STRAWBERRY and that if you enter CHOCOLATE you can also enter MINT When you must choose only one of several options the options are enclosed in braces and are separated by vertical bars GUAVA MANGO PASSIONFRUIT means that you must enter either GUAVA MANGO or PASSIONFRUIT but you cannot enter more than one choice An ellipsis indicates that you can enter an indefinite number of additional items such as the one immedi ately preceding the ellipsis For example old column name means that you can enter a series of existing column names after the first one Inde
234. ollowing ways m Using the Alter option on the TABLE menu to change an existing table m Using the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE menu to change a table that you are creating m From the SQL menu running the SQL statement ALTER TABLE to change an existing table or running ALTER FRAGMENT to alter existing table or index fragmentation strategy or to create table fragments Dropping a Table With DB Access you can drop a table from a database in either of the following ways m Using the Drop option on the TABLE menu m Running the SQL statement DROP TABLE from the SOL menu Getting Table Information You can get information about the structure and characteristics of a table in the following ways m Using the Info option on the TABLE menu m Using the Info option on the SQL menu m Running the SQL statement INFO from the SQL menu To query on the data that is in the tables in a relational database issue a SELECT statement from the SQL editor For information on how to create and use the SELECT statement see Chapters 2 and 3 in the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial In addition several command files included with DB Access contain sample SELECT statements with which you can practice These and other command files are listed and discussed in Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option and are illustrated in Appendix A Creating Databases and Tables 2 9 The DB Access Facilities The DB Access Facilities Special DB Access
235. on Fragments displays fragmentation strategy for the selected table See The Fragments Option on page 5 93 Exit leaves the INFO menu and returns you to the TABLE menu Select an option by using the Arrow keys to highlight it with the cursor or by typing in the first capitalized letter in the option name Depending on the option you immediately see a display of information or you must enter data in a new menu or screen before the information appears Tip You cannot find out the initial and next extent sizes or the lock mode for a table through the Info option You can however view and change the extent size and lock mode options through the Table_options option on the CREATE TABLE menu which is available through the Table option on the main menu You can also issue a SELECT statement within the SQL menu to access the systables system catalog table You also cannot view an index fill factor through this option because the fill factor information is not stored in a system catalog table You can use the Info option to request information about external tables on an INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server by entering the expanded table name at the prompt The following example requests information on the table bunyip customer in the stores7 database on the OnLine database server topend INFO FOR TABLE gt gt stores 7 topend bunyip customer The Table Menu Option 5 85 The Columns Option The Columns Option Figure 5 80 shows the kind
236. on Schema is available with both the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and INFORMIX SE database server 1 28 DB Access User Manual The DB Access Main Menu The command in the following example executes the script that creates the Information Schema and installs the views for the stores7 database dbaccess stores INFORMIXDIR etc xpg4_is sql For more information on the Information Schema views see Chapter 2 of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference Tip Informix does not recommend that you install these XPG4 compliant views on UY an ANSI database because their format differs considerably from that of the ANSI compliant Information Schema views as defined by the SQL standards committee The DB Access Main Menu When you start DB Access the DB Access main menu appears as shown in Figure 1 5 Figure 1 5 DB Access Query language Connection Database Table Session Exit The DB Access Use Informix Structured Query Language r main menu The DB Access main menu displays the following options Query displays the SQL menu that lets you work with the structured language query language Select this option to enter and run SQL state ments See Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option Connection displays the CONNECTION menu Select this option to connect to a database server and select a database or to disconnect from the current database environment See Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options D
237. on of these keywords and available workarounds Tip If the DELIMIDENT environment variable is set DB Access accepts delimited identifiers in SQL statements You can thus include a database object name in double quotes in an SQL statement and avoid keyword ambiguities and errors when creating a database See Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option for infor mation on issuing SQL statements See Chapter 4 in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference for information on DELIMIDENT m See the discussion of INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and INFORMIX SE database server differences in Differences Between OnLine and SE on page 4 10 for additional restrictions The Database Menu Option 4 9 Differences Between OnLine and SE When you create a database any current database is automatically closed and the one you create becomes the current database DB Access displays the name of the current database in the middle of the broken line that separates the top and bottom of the screen If you enter the name of an existing database DB Access displays an error message You also can issue the CREATE DATABASE statement to create a database For details see Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option Also see the discussion of the CREATE DATABASE statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for information about logging ANSI compliance and other usage guidelines Important A database created in an environment
238. option 3 21 5 92 INFO statement getting table information 2 48 Information displaying for current database 2 39 4 15 displaying for current session 1 23 6 10 displaying for tables 3 19 5 83 Information Schema 1 28 INFORMIXDIR environment variable 1 6 INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server creating an ANSI compliant database with CREATE DATABASE 2 41 differences from INFORMIX SE 1 4 where system information is stored 2 19 where table information is stored 2 29 INFORMIX SE creating an ANSI compliant database with CREATE DATABASE 2 41 where system files are stored 2 19 where table information is stored 2 29 INFORMIXSERVER environment variable required 1 6 INFORMIXTERM environment variable 1 6 Input executing shell commands from standard 1 27 interactive 1 26 reading from standard 1 25 Installing a language supplement 1 10 INTEGER data type 5 14 Interactive input through standard input 1 26 Interactive Schema Editor See Schema editor Interrupt key 1 11 INTERVAL data type 5 14 Invoking DB Access checking for ANSI compliance 1 22 command line options 1 12 DATABASE menu options 1 16 1 17 displaying the main menu 1 13 displaying the version number 1 24 echoing file input to a screen 1 20 executing a command file 1 20 going to a submenu 1 15 going to a submenu option 1 16 selecting a database 1 14 SQL menu options 1 17 TABLE menu options 1 18 ISED See Schema editor K Keys Arrow 1 11 BACKSPACE 1 11 CONTR
239. options Add inserts a new line before the current line and makes the dbspace name field current The SELECT DBSPACE screen appears with a list of dbspaces on the current OnLine database server you can select a new dbspace to add to the end of the list see The SELECT DBSPACE Screen on page 5 68 Drop deletes the current highlighted dbspace from the existing strategy It does not drop the dbspace from the OnLine database server E Important You can add or delete only one dbspace during one ALTER FRAGMENT session Screen displays the next screen page of dbspaces for the fragmentation strategy Init defines a new fragmentation strategy discards the current strategy and initializes the new strategy The FRAGMENT menu appears so you can redefine and initialize the fragmentation strategy for the table see The FRAGMENT Menu on page 5 68 The Table Menu Option 5 67 The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Round robin Strategy aTtach attaches one or more tables onto the current table The ATTACH TABLES menu for round robin fragmentation strategy appears see The ATTACH TABLES Menu on page 70 detaCh detaches records from the current table from a specific dbspace and creates a new table with those records The DETACH DBSPACE screen appears see The DETACH DBSPACE Menu on page 5 71 Exit exits the ALTER FRAGMENT menu for round robin strategy and returns to the TABLE_OPTIONS menu The SELECT DBSPACE Screen Select the
240. options available with DB Access These menu options are detailed in Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option Select the Table option from the DB Access main menu to call up the TABLE menu as shown in Figure 2 32 Figure 2 32 TABLE Alter Info Drop Exit Using en options Create a new table to drop a table the TABLE menu Creating Databases and Tables 2 35 How to Drop a Table Menu Select the Drop option from the TABLE menu to drop an existing table schema DB Access displays the DROP TABLE screen as shown in Figure 2 33 a q Figure 2 33 DROP TABLE gt gt Enter the table name you wish to drop from the database Using menu options to drop a table the DROP TABLE menu customer orders This screen lists the names of tables that exist in the current database Type the name of the table you want to drop and press RETURN or highlight the name of the table using the Arrow keys and press RETURN You are then asked to confirm that you want to drop the table Select Yes if you do or No if you do not m If you select Yes DB Access drops the table and all its data and returns you to the TABLE menu m If you select No DB Access returns you to the TABLE menu and leaves the specified table and its data intact To drop a table you must be the owner of the table or have DBA privileges in the current database 2 36 DB Access User Manual How to Drop a Database Menu How to Drop a Database Menu
241. or DB Access prompts you to enter the following information about each column in a table The column name The column data type The column length if required An index for the column including the fill factor Whether the column allows null values 5 10 DB Access User Manual Adding a Column to a Table You define these column attributes through a series of screens beginning with the ADD NAME screen Use the ADD screens to define characteristics of a table as described in the following list ADD NAME names the column you want to add to the table ADD TYPE defines the column data type ADD LENGTH sets the column length ADD INDEX defines an index for the column ADD NULLS allows or disallows null values in the column You must move the highlight through each field of the screen for each column you are adding to the table Press RETURN or an Arrow key to accept the default entry for each field As you enter information in each field the highlight moves from left to right across the screen As the table schema is created the data displays on the screen and the next ADD screen appears At any time you can press the Interrupt key to return to the previous ADD screen without adding anything on the current screen You can change any entry in a line before you move to the next line by using the left and right Arrow keys to move through the line The appropriate ADD screen appears and you can change your entry Once you move
242. or information on unique constraints on columns in the chosen table or the Defaults option to display columns in the chosen table that have default values Selecting the Reference Option When you select the Reference option from the CONSTRAINTS menu the REFERENCE menu appears as shown in Figure 3 22 A gt Figure 3 22 REFERENCE mytab referenceD Exit Display foreign key constraints The REFERENCE menu The REFERENCE menu lets you display the foreign key referencing constraints and columns of the current table as well as whether cascading deletes are enabled You can also display the referenced columns in which columns of another table reference columns in the current tables as foreign keys Select the Referencing option to display the foreign key constraints in the current table Figure 3 23 is an example of a possible display Figure 3 23 REFERENCE myaccts Referencing referenceD Exit Display foreign key constraints The iia menu wit sub_accounts referencing Constraint Name Referencing Column Referenced Table Referenced Column information r107_13 ref_num accounts acc_num ref_type acc_type The foreign key information shown on this menu includes the constraint name the referencing columns of the current table the referenced table and its columns and whether cascading deletes are enabled The Query language Menu Option 3 25 The cOnstraints Option After a constraint is displayed press the I
243. oreign characters in database table and column names Figure 5 13 EXIT abonn s Discard new table The EXIT menu used Builds a new table and returns to the Table Menu for building an NLS Page 1 of client le Press CTRL W for Help table Column Name Length Index Nulls num ro 13600 Unique No nom 24 Yes pr nom Yes adresse Yes cit Yes pays Yes IO 5 20 DB Access User Manual Modifying a Column in a Table Modifying a Column in a Table The procedure for using the schema editor to modify a column in a table is the same as previously described for creating a column in a table in Adding a Column to a Table on page 5 10 The screen names now say MODIFY instead of ADD You can modify the following fields in the table schema Column changes the column name Name Type changes the column data type Length changes the column length Index redefines an index for the column Nulls allows or disallows null values in the column Modify an existing column with the following steps 1 Use the Arrow keys to highlight the column definition that you want to modify 2 Select the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE menu and press RETURN 3 DB Access displays the appropriate screen for the field you want to modify as shown in the following table Field to Modify Screen Name Column Name MODIFY NAME Column Data Type MODIFY TYPE Column Length MODIFY LENGTH Index on
244. ormat XLUF feature in DB Access at the command line as shown in the following example dbaccess _ X Y X activates the hexadecimal format for LOAD and UNLOAD statements 1 24 DB Access User Manual Other Command Line Features When you invoke DB Access with the X flag the LOAD and UNLOAD SQL statements can format nonprintable ASCII signs in hexadecimal format m The LOAD statement can read data properly if the hexadecimal format is present m The unl file produced by the UNLOAD statement contains the hexadecimal format changes and the data is appended correctly For more information see the descriptions of the LOAD and UNLOAD statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Also see the discussion of the various SQL utilities in the Informix Migration Guide and the data types information in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference Important The unl files containing data in a hexadecimal format are not backward compatible with versions prior to Version 6 0 However unl files generated without the XLUF functionality are fully backward compatible Other Command Line Features DB Access has other useful command line capabilities It lets you perform the following actions Read from standard input Do interactive input through standard input Execute shell commands from standard input View the XPG4 Information Schema Reading from Standard Input When no menu ar
245. oses the Create option on the TABLE menu td chooses the Drop option on the TABLE menu ti chooses the Info option on the TABLE menu With this option you can add another letter as shown in the following list and specify a table to go to the next menu level and view tic columns in the table tif information on fragmentation strategy for the table tig information on triggers in the table tii indexes on the table tio table constraints tip access privileges on the table tir table level references privilege on the table tis table status information Tip You cannot go directly to the Run or Output option on the SQL menu Trying to do so results in an error message When you select the Modify option on the SQL menu you must first select a command file to modify from the CHOOSE menu The MODIFY screen then appears and displays the text If you do not include a database name before a q or t option or before any di option you must choose a current database from the SELECT DATABASE screen Then the requested menu or screen appears If you do not include a table name before any qi or ti option you must choose a table from the INFO FOR TABLE screen Then the requested screen appears Certain other options that are not listed also allow you to go to another level of menu options For example dcl database takes you to the LOG option on the CREATE DATABASE menu 1 18 DB Access User Manual Going to a Subme
246. osing a Database on page 4 21 Exit exits the DATABASE menu and returns you to the DB Access main menu The Database Menu Option 4 5 Selecting a Database SELECT DATABASE gt gt O Selecting a Database To work with an existing database choose the Select option from the DATABASE menu The SELECT DATABASE screen appears as shown in Figure 4 2 Figure 4 2 The SELECT Select a database with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return moorea coral mydata dbserverl stores7 dbserverl DATABASE screen The list of databases is accompanied by names of database servers The list is organized alphabetically by database server and then by database for each database server The first database in the list is highlighted In NLS mode the list of database names is sorted according to the DB Access current LC_COLLATE setting Thus the order in which the database names are listed might vary depending on the setting The SELECT DATABASE Screen The SELECT DATABASE screen also appears whenever you need to specify a database such as when you choose the Table or Query language option without specifying a database when you enter the dbaccess command at the system prompt The database list displayed by the SELECT DATABASE screen depends on the current connection m If there is no current connection or the current connection is an implicit default connection all databases in the DBPATH appear
247. otation marks if you use the second method and do not include any spaces If you have multiple INFORMIX SE database servers you can create a database on another SE database server by including the full pathname at the prompt on the CREATE DATABASE screen The following example specifies the troppo database in the yasawa directory on the tonga database server tonga yasawa troppo With the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server you can use a DB Access menu option to create a database that is ANSI compliant and has logging See Specifying Logging on OnLine on page 4 12 With INFORMIX SE you can turn on logging from within the Query language option with the START DATABASE statement See Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option for details on issuing SQL statements If you are the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server administrator user informix you also can make an OnLine database ANSI compliant and start logging with the Databases option of the LOGICAL LOGS menu in ON Monitor See the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide for details The discussion of the CREATE DATABASE menu for the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server begins on page 4 12 The discussion of the CREATE DATABASE menu for the INFORMIX SE database server begins on page 4 13 The Database Menu Option 4 11 The OnLine CREATE DATABASE Menu The OnLine CREATE DATABASE Menu Once you name the new database you see the CREATE DATABASE menu It differs fo
248. ou press CRTL C on the USER NAME screen DB Access might try to connect to the specified database server rather than interrupt the session This happens O because pressing CRTL C on this screen is considered the equivalent of using the current user name The Connection and Session Menu Options 6 5 Connecting to a Database Environment If the user identifier and password combination is valid you connect to the target database server You can then select a database on that database server The SELECT DATABASE SERVER screen appears as shown in Figure 6 4 SELECT DATABASE SERVER gt gt Figure 6 4 Select a server with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT DATABASE SERVER screen cowry seahorse starfish The SELECT DATABASE SERVER screen shows an alphabetical list of database servers from the INFORMIXDIR etc sqlhosts file The first entry is highlighted Press RETURN to select that database server or select a different database server If entries span more than one page use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to highlight the ellipses and the next page of database servers appears m If you do not have permission to connect to the specified database server you get an error message Select a different database server for which you have permission or ask your INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server or INFORMIX SE database server administrator for permission to connect to the database server m Ifyou ha
249. ough the SQL menu you can run these statements save them to a file for later use send their results to a printer or file or modify them with an editor You can check your SQL statements for ANSI compatibility in the following ways m When the DBANSIWARN environment variable is set DB Access generates a warning whenever it encounters an Informix extension to ANSI standard syntax m You can use the ansi flag to check SOL statements for ANSI compatibility when you invoke DB Access on the command line 2 12 DB Access User Manual Using SQL Statements List of Available SQL Statements Figure 2 4 through Figure 2 7 list all the SQL statements that you can run from the SQL menu of the DB Access utility For the complete syntax and full description of how to use most of these SQL statements see Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax For additional information on SQL see Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial See the INFORMIX OnLine Optical User Manual for information on the statements exclusive to that product Figure 2 4 lists all the SOL statements that you can run with either an INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server or INFORMIX SE database server Figure 2 4 SQL statements you can run with OnLine or SE ALTER INDEX EXECUTE PROCEDURE ALTER TABLE GRANT BEGIN WORK INFO CLOSE DATABASE INSERT COMMIT WORK LOAD CONNECT LOCK TABLE CREATE DATABASE OUTPUT CREATE INDEX RENAME COLUMN CREATE PROCEDURE RENAME TABLE CRE
250. ount 21 1 row s retrieved gt D 1 26 DB Access User Manual Other Command Line Features Executing Shell Commands from Standard Input When DB Access takes input from standard input any source it takes any line that begins with an exclamation mark and runs it as a shell command in a separate process You can mix shell escape lines with SQL statements and can put them in the middle of SOL statements as shown in the following example dbaccess stores7 gt select lecho hello gt hello count from systables gt count 21 1 row s retrieved gt Connecting to a Database Environment in Non Menu Mode You can use the CONNECT USER syntax in SQL statements issued in inter active mode However DB Access does not support the USING password syntax of the CONNECT statement in certain situations Connecting in Interactive Non Menu Mode When you include the USER clause in a CONNECT statement in interactive mode DB Access prompts you to enter a password You can either enter a user identifier or press the RETURN key If you type in a password you cannot see it on the screen The following command examples show how to connect to a database server in interactive mode The first example uses the CONNECT statement without a USING clause dbaccess gt connect to starfish Disconnected Connected Working with DB Access 1 27 Other Command Line Features If you include the USER cl
251. pen CAE common applications environment standards Informix SQL based products are compliant with ANSI SOL 92 Entry Level published as ANSI X3 135 1992 on INFORMIX SE with the following exceptions m Effective checking of constraints m Serializable transactions Introduction 19 Informix Welcomes Your Comments Informix Welcomes Your Comments Please let us know what you like or dislike about our manuals To help us with future versions of our manuals please tell us about any corrections or clarifications that you would find useful Write to us at the following address Informix Software Inc SCT Technical Publications Department 4100 Bohannon Drive Menlo Park CA 94025 If you prefer to send electronic mail our address is doc informix com Or send a facsimile to the Informix Technical Publications Department at 415 926 6571 Please include the following information m The name version and page number of the manual that you are using Any comments that you have about the manual Your name address and phone number We appreciate your feedback 20 DB Access User Manual Working with DB Access What Is DB Access Differences Between OnLine and SE i Using the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Using the INFORMIX SE Database Server Preparing to Use DB Access Setting Standard Environment Variables ee Setting Environment Variables for NLS or GLS Mode Creating the Demonstration Database A Installing
252. phs that offer additional details or shortcuts for the functionality that is being described Command Line Conventions DB Access supports a variety of command line options You enter these commands at the operating system prompt to perform certain functions or go to specified menus in DB Access Each valid command line option is illustrated in a diagram in Chapter 1 of the DB Access User Manual This section defines and illustrates the format of the commands that are available in DB Access and other Informix products These commands have their own conventions which might include alternative forms of acommand required and optional parts of the command and so forth Each diagram displays the sequences of required and optional elements that are valid ina command A diagram begins at the upper left with a command It ends at the upper right with a vertical line Between these points you can trace any path that does not stop or back up Each path describes a valid form of the command You must supply a value for words that are in italics Introduction 11 Command Line Conventions You might encounter one or more of the following elements on a command line path Element Description command This required element is usually the product name or other short word that invokes the product or calls the compiler or preprocessor script for a compiled Informix product It might appear alone or precede one or more options You mus
253. ppears with a list of dbspaces from which to choose See The SELECT DBSPACE Menu on page 5 74 Then the EDIT EXPRESSION menu appears so you can enter or modify an expression for the dbspace See The EDIT EXPRESSION Menu on page 5 77 Drop drops the highlighted expression current line from the existing strategy It does not drop the dbspace from the OnLine database server Important You can add or delete only one dbspace or modify only one expression during one ALTER FRAGMENT session Screen displays the next screen page of the expression fragmentation strategy Init defines a new fragmentation strategy discards the current strategy and initializes the new strategy The FRAGMENT menu appears which allows you to redefine and initialize the fragmentation strategy of the table See The FRAGMENT Menu on page 5 81 aTtach attaches one or more tables onto the current table The ATTACH TABLES menu appears allowing you to attach tables to an already fragmented table See The ATTACH TABLES Menu on page 5 76 detaCh detaches records from the current table from a specific dbspace and creates a new table with those records The DETACH DBSPACE screen appears with a list of dbspaces in the fragmented table See The DETACH DBSPACE Screen on page 5 79 Then the NEW TABLE screen appears See The NEW TABLE Screen on page 5 80 Exit exits the ALTER FRAGMENT menu and returns to the TABLE_OPTIONS menu
254. pter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options for details The Database Menu Option 4 7 Differences Between OnLine and SE Differences Between OnLine and SE The list of available databases displayed on the SELECT DATABASE screen might vary depending on whether you are using an INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server or INFORMIX SE database server m With OnLine DB Access displays the names of all databases on the current INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and in your DBPATH setting If multiple OnLine database servers are running on your computer the ONCONFIG environment variable determines the current database server m With SE DB Access displays the names of databases located in the current directory and in any directories specified in your DBPATH environment variable If you have more than one INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server you can select a database on another OnLine database server by specifying the server name with the database name at the prompt on the SELECT DATABASE screen Either of the following commands selects the cuttle database on the squid database server cuttle squid squid cuttle The first method is preferred Remember to include quotation marks if you use the second method and do not include any spaces If you have multiple INFORMIX SE database servers you can select a database on another SE database server by including the full pathname at the prompt on the SELECT DATABASE screen The following command s
255. r OnLine shown in Figure 4 4 and SE Figure 4 4 CREATE DATABASE personnel Pbspace Log Exit Th pees Select a dbspace for storing the database s data e DATABASE menu for OnLine With OnLine you can specify that a database be stored in a non root dbspace or create a database with or without buffered transaction logging or create an ANSI compliant database Specifying a Dbspace Select the Dbspace option and the SELECT DBSPACE screen appears as shown in Figure 4 5 0 Figure 4 5 SELECT DBSPACE gt gt Select a dbspace with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT DBSPACE screen for Press CTRL W for Help OnLine pers_dbs empl_dbs Select an available dbspace from the list in which to store database data The default is rootdbs or a dbspace that you created as the default You then return to the CREATE DATABASE menu Specifying Logging on OnLine Select the Log option if you want to specify the type of transaction logging The LOG menu appears as shown in Figure 4 6 O Figure 4 6 LOG personnel None Log Buffered_log log_Mode_ansi Exit Do not activate transaction logging The LOG oe ntine A 4 12 DB Access User Manual The INFORMIX SE CREATE DATABASE Menu The LOG menu displays the following options None is the default and does not activate transaction logging Log specifies unbuffered transaction logging Buffered_log specifies buffered transaction logging l
256. r current database directory includes a number of command files that contain SQL statements Some of these files are included with the demonstration database when the database server is installed others might have been created by you and put in the directory with the Save option on the SQL menu and others might have become available when a language supplement was installed with DB Access You can remove command files from the current database directory by selecting the Drop option on the SQL menu The DROP COMMAND FILE screen appears with an alphabetical list of command files in the current database as shown in Figure 3 34 3 30 DB Access User Manual Dropping an SQL Statement DROP COMMAND FILE gt gt Figure 3 34 Enter the name of the sql command file you wish to drop from the database The DROP COMMAND FILE stores7 dbserver1 Press CTRL W for Help screen with sample c_state sel_ojoinl files c_calls c_stock d_view sel_ojoin2 gcat c_stores del_stock sel_ojoin3 c_custom c_table ins_table sel_ojoin4 c_index c_trig opt_disk sel_order c_items c_type sel_agg sel_sub c_manuf c_viewl sel_all sel_union c_orders c_view2 sel_group upd_table c_proc d_proc sel_join In NLS mode the list of filenames is sorted according to the current LC_COLLATE setting for DB Access Thus the order in which the command file names are listed might vary depending on the setting The Query language Menu Option 3 31 Dropping an SQL Statement
257. r disable cascading deletes when dropping a parent row thereby maintaining referential integrity Figure 5 31 ADD ENABLE CASCADING DELETES mytab3 No Yes Do not enable cascading Bsa ice The O Page drofa DELETES menu Constraint Referencing Column Referenced Table Referenced Column CD consl coll yourtab col6 N When you enable cascading deletes and you delete a parent record all the corresponding child records are also deleted If you do not enable cascading deletes you cannot delete a parent record if there are child records The default is No Move the cursor to highlight Yes if you want to enable cascading deletes Press RETURN and your choice is added and the highlight moves to the Referencing Column field 5 38 DB Access User Manual Defining Constraints The FOREIGN KEY Menu the Modify Option The Modify option lets you modify the current field Move the cursor to highlight the field you want to modify Depending on the field a different prompt appears m The MODIFY CONSTRAINT NAME prompt appears for the Constraint field m The MODIFY COLUMN NAME prompt appears for the Referencing Column or Referenced Column field m The MODIFY REFERENCED TABLE prompt appears for the Refer enced Table field Change the entry for the field and press RETURN to modify it or press the Interrupt key if you do not want to modify a foreign constraint The FOREIGN KEY Menu the Drop Option The Drop option displays
258. r the SQL statements that you can use with DB Access Choosing the Query language Option Select the Query language option from the DB Access main menu to use SQL Press the Q key or highlight the Query language option and press RETURN and the SQL menu appears as shown in Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 soL New Run Modify Use editor Output Choose Save Info Drop Exit The SQL menu Enter new SQL statements using the SQL editor The Query language Menu Option 3 3 Choosing the Query language Option New Run Modify Use editor Output Choose Save Info Drop Exit 3 4 DB Access User Manual The SQL menu displays the following options lets you enter new SQL statements using the SQL editor See Entering a New SQL Statement on page 3 5 executes the current SQL statement or statements See Running an SQL Statement on page 3 6 lets you modify the current SOL statement or statements using the SQL editor See Modifying an SQL Statement on page 3 9 lets you enter or edit SQL statements with a system editor See Editing an SQL Statement on page 3 10 routes the output from executing the current SQL statements to a system file printer or system pipe See Redirecting Query Results on page 3 12 lets you select an existing command file containing SQL state ments and make them your current statements You can run or edit the current statements See Choosing an Exist
259. rage option which is on the CREATE TABLE menu in INFORMIX SE These options let you specify the dbspaces extent sizes and the locking mode for OnLine tables m The Variable length option on the ISED ADD TYPE menu lets you specify the VARCHAR TEXT and BYTE data types for columns as well as the NVARCHAR data type for Native Language Support NLS m When you display table information using the Status option on the INFO menu of the SOL or TABLE menu or use the keywords INFO STATUS in an SQL statement you do not see audit trail file infor mation because the OnLine logging facility replaces audit trails 1 4 DB Access User Manual Differences Between OnLine and SE A dBspace option on the DATABASE INFO menu and a Dbspace option on the TABLE_OPTIONS menu let you retrieve information on available dbspaces and select one for storing data The Log option on the CREATE DATABASE menu provides different options for OnLine and INFORMIX SE These options are described in Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option Certain SQL statements or keywords might be specific to OnLine The syntax and use for all SQL statements that you can use with DB Access are listed in Chapter 2 Creating Databases and Tables and are described in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax OnLine has special screens and menus that support fragmentation and Parallel Database Queries PDQ They are accessed through the Table_options option on the CREAT
260. rce the file before you begin to work with DB Access so the shell can read your entries Complete details of how to set and use these and other Informix and UNIX environment variables are provided in Chapter 4 of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference Working with DB Access 1 7 Setting Environment Variables for NLS or GLS Mode Setting Environment Variables for NLS or GLS Mode GLS DB Access is NLS ready and GLS ready For details see the Guide to GLS 1 8 DB Access User Manual Functionality You can choose whether to activate NLS capability and specify certain behaviors by setting the following environment variables The DBNLS environment variable enables the NLS features Set this environment variable before starting the application If DBNLS is not set DB Access cannot provide NLS functionality A database created in a DBNLS environment is an NLS database Only NLS applications can access this database through NLS database servers The database server rejects any request to access an NLS database by a non NLS application Once DBNLS is set set the LANG environment variable to specify the locale of the database operations that follow Each LANG setting determines the messages collating sequences character classifica tions and local customs information It is used throughout the lifetime of the database For example you could set LANG to a value for German For information about GLS locales see the Guide to GLS
261. re 1 2 Figure 1 2 DB Access JQuery Tanguagd Connection Database Table Session Exit Th Bea Use Informix Structured Query Language e z ccessS main menu with skink tuatara Press CTRL W for Help database and database server name You can now begin working with the DB Access menus and screens You can specify a database on another INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server by including the database server name with the database name on the command line Either of the following commands selects the kiwi database on the pavlova database server as the current database dbaccess kiwi pavlova dbaccess pavlova kiwi 1 14 DB Access User Manual Selecting a Menu Option You can specify a database on another INFORMIX SE database server by including the database server name and directory path with the database name on the command line Enter the following command to select the fiji database in the islands directory on the southsea database server dbaccess southsea islands fiji For more information on how to select or name a database refer to the Database Name and Identifier sections in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Selecting a Menu Option You can include a command line option to invoke DB Access and select an option from the main menu dbaccess database X Z c goes directly to the CONNECTION menu d goes directly to the DATABASE menu q goes directly to the SQL query language menu
262. reate an index on the column If you select the Yes option DB Access prompts you to indicate whether the index allows duplicates Whichever option you select on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server the ADD FILL FACTOR PERCENTAGE screen appears so you can specify the fill factor Important This option creates a nonclustered ascending index for the values in the associated database column in the dbspace where the table was created To create a different type of index you must use the SQL statement CREATE INDEX Creating Databases and Tables 2 23 Calling Up the Table Schema For the customer_num column definition DB Access automatically supplies a value for the Index column The word Unique appears under the Index heading because DB Access assumes you want to index a column with a SERIAL data type Also because it is a SERIAL column duplicate values should not exist Allowing Null Values After you define the index for the column you can determine whether the column allows null values DB Access displays the ADD NULLS menu as shown in Figure 2 25 Figure 2 25 ADD NULLS clients Yes No Usi 9 Permits null values in this column sing menu options to create a table the Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help ADD NULLS menu Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial 101 Unique The ADD NULLS menu displays the following options Yes allows null values in the column No does not allow null
263. reen 1 20 1 22 executing a command file 1 20 1 22 going to a submenu 1 15 going to a submenu option 1 16 selecting a database 1 14 Comments including in text 1 38 Committing transactions with the TRANSACTION menu 4 22 6 9 Confirmation screen creating a database on OnLine 4 13 creating a database on SE 4 15 dropping a column 5 61 dropping a command file 3 32 dropping a database 4 21 Connecting to a database environment 2 18 6 4 CONNECTION menu available options 6 4 selecting from the main menu 2 18 6 4 shown 2 18 6 4 CONNECTION menu in DB Access PASSWORD prompt screen 6 5 USER NAME prompt screen 6 5 Constraints adding with ALTER TABLE 2 47 adding with CREATE TABLE 5 34 check adding 5 40 check defining 5 40 check dropping 5 42 check information on 3 27 5 90 check modifying 5 41 check paging through 5 42 default values defining 5 45 defining 5 34 displaying for a table 3 21 5 88 displaying information with the cOnstraints option 3 24 5 88 dropping 2 33 dropping with ALTER TABLE 2 47 enabling cascading deletes 5 38 foreign key adding 5 37 foreign key defining 5 37 foreign key dropping 5 39 foreign key information on 3 25 5 88 foreign key modifying 5 39 foreign key paging through 5 39 modifying 2 33 primary key adding 5 35 primary key defining 5 35 primary key dropping 5 36 primary key information on 3 26 5 90 primary key modifying 5 36 primary key paging through 5 36 reference informatio
264. reen Option Use the Screen option to page to the next page of constraints listed for the current table The PRIMARY KEY Menu the Exit Option Select the Exit option to return to the CONSTRAINTS menu where you can define foreign key constraints for the primary key constraints Data Validation When you enter a primary constraint DB Access validates your entry by verifying the following information m The column name is not repeated m There are no more than 16 column names in one constraint for the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server or 8 column names for the INFORMIX SE database server m The column is not assigned the BYTE or TEXT data type 5 36 DB Access User Manual Defining Constraints Defining Foreign Key Constraints To create modify or drop foreign key constraints for the current table select the Foreign option on the CONSTRAINTS menu The FOREIGN KEY menu appears as shown in Figure 5 30 Figure 5 30 FOREIGN KEY mytab Add Modify Drop Screen Exit Add a constraint name or referencing referenced column pair The FOREIGN KEY menu Page 1 of 1 Constraint Referencing Column Referenced Table Referenced Column CD unassigned0 columnl table2 columnl column2 column2 column3 column3 The FOREIGN KEY menu lists any existing foreign key constraints and has the following options Add adds a foreign key constraint name or referencing referenced column pair Modify modifies a foreign key constraint definit
265. reen appears and displays a list of the command files that you can access These files have the extension sql although the extension is not shown For example Figure 3 11 lists the command files that are included with the stores7 demonstration database they are illustrated and described in Appendix A Sample Command Files Figure 3 11 Choose a command file with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The CHOOSE screen listing current stores7 dbserverl command files c_calls c_cat c_custom c_index c_items c_manuf c_orders c_proc c_state sel_ojoinl c_stock d_view sel_ojoin2 c_stores del_stock sel_ojoin3 c_table ins_table sel_ojoin4 c_trig opt_disk sel_order c_type sel_agg sel_sub c_viewl sel_all sel_union c_view2 sel_group upd_table d_proc sel_join If there is no current database the list includes all the command files located in the current directory and in any directories specified by the DBPATH environment variable In NLS mode the list of file names is sorted according to the current LC_COLLATE setting for DB Access The order in which the command files are listed might vary depending on the setting To select a command file use the Arrow keys to highlight its name or type the name of the file at the prompt and then press RETURN The Query language Menu Option 3 15 Sample SQL Command Files The SQL menu reappears with the statements contained in the command file displayed on the s
266. riables in your profile login or cshre file they are assigned automatically every time you log on to the system Important If you set or modify the environment variables in a file rather than on the command line log out and then log back in or source the file before you begin to work with DB Access so the shell can read your entries Details of how to set and use environment variables are provided in Chapter 4 of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference See also Chapter 2 of the Guide to GLS Functionality for information on Global Language Support GLS and NLS features and environment variables Creating the Demonstration Database The examples in this manual are based on the stores7 demonstration database The structure contents and relationship of all the tables that comprise the stores7 database are described in Appendix A of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference The system catalog tables for the stores7 database are described in Chapter 2 of that book If you have not already done so create the demonstration database as described in Demonstration Database in the Introduction to this manual Working with DB Access 1 9 Installing a Language Supplement Installing a Language Supplement If you want NLS functionality in DB Access you must set the appropriate environment variables as described in Setting Environment Variables for NLS or GLS Mode on page 1 8 If you want messages and menu options in a langua
267. rice of less than 25 00 or that have been ordered in quantities greater than three and it lists their stock_num and manu_code SELECT DISTINCT stock_num manu_code FROM stock WHERE unit_price lt 25 00 UNION SELECT stock_num manu_code FROM items WHERE quantity gt 3 upd_table sql The following example updates the sports table that was created by the c_table sql command file This is available only with the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server UPDATE sports SET phone 808 555 1212 WHERE mfg_code PARKR Sample Command Files A 15 How to Read On Line Help This appendix shows the conventions that are used in DB Access on line Help screens You receive on line Help when you press CTRL W while you are working in the product On line Help is discussed in Using the HELP Screen on page 1 35 The form of the syntax diagrams that appear when you request on line Help for creating modifying or editing an SOL statement is different than the syntax conventions you see in the Introduc tion The notational conventions and rules governing SQL state ment syntax shown in on line Help are described on the following page For more detailed syntax diagrams as well as information on naming identifiers databases and command files see Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax ABC Any term in an SQL statement displayed in upper case letters is a keyword Type keywords exactly dis regarding case as shown in the f
268. rn stores7 mynewdb To select a database highlight it with an Arrow key or enter the name at the prompt and press RETURN You return to the DATABASE menu For details see Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option Creating Databases and Tables 2 17 Leaving the Menu You also can select a database through the Connection option on the main menu which invokes the CONNECTION menu as shown in Figure 2 16 0 Figure 2 16 CONNECTION Connect Disconnect Exit gt Connect to a database environment Using menu options to select a database the CONNECTION menu Select the Connect option to display the SELECT DATABASE SERVER screen You can specify a user ID or a user ID and password for your connection When you select a database server from the list the SELECT DATABASE menu appears listing available databases To select a database highlight it with an Arrow key or enter the name and press RETURN You return to the DATABASE menu For details see Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options Leaving the Menu Exit the DATABASE menu by pressing the E key or by highlighting Exit using an Arrow key The DB Access main menu reappears as shown in Figure 2 17 o Figure 2 17 DB Access Query language Connection Database Table Session Exit Use Informix Structured Query Language Using menu options to create a database exiting the DATABASE menu You always have the option of leaving the cu
269. rrent menu or screen On most menus simply select the Exit option In the processes described in this chapter certain menus or screens do not have an Exit option You can always leave the current screen or menu and move up a level in the menu hierarchy without making any choices or changes by pressing the Interrupt key usually DEL or CTRL C 2 18 DB Access User Manual Where System Information Is Stored Where System Information Is Stored When you create a database a number of system tables that describe the structure of the database are generated automatically These system tables make up the system catalog The INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server creates the system catalog which contains the data dictionary that describes the structure of the new database in a common area of the disk called a dbspace If you do not specify the dbspace OnLine creates the system catalog in the root dbspace See Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option for how to use menu options to view dbspace information and specify a dbspace With the INFORMIX SE database server the system tables and data for the new database are placed in a subdirectory of your current directory named for the database The subdirectory has the extension dbs for example mydata dbs DB Access uses the system catalog to keep track of the tables columns indexes views synonyms and privileges in each database The system catalog is described in Chapter 2 of the Inform
270. rrent screen Use it when you receive an electronic message or some other interference that makes it difficult to read the SQL statement text that you enter Deletes a character beneath the cursor Returns you to the SOL menu when you finish entering or editing the SQL statement You can then run or modify the statement or select the system editor for more extensive editing You might also want to refer to the use of Arrow and cursor positioning keys in How to Use Your Terminal on page 1 11 Working with DB Access 1 37 Using the SQL Editor Editing Restrictions The SQL editor does not display more than 80 characters on a line and does not wrap lines m If you choose an existing command file in which the characters in a line extend beyond the 80th column DB Access displays a percent sign in the 80th column to indicate an overflow You cannot see all the characters beyond the percent sign but the statement should run correctly m If you type characters in a new command file so that a line extends beyond the 80th column DB Access overwrites all the characters in the 80th column You cannot see the overflow and the statement does not run correctly Although DB Access might read and compile characters beyond the percent sign it is difficult to work with text that is not visible You should press RETURN at a logical place in the first 80 characters of each line so the full text appears on the screen If you need to type a q
271. s referential primary key check unique and defaults triggers status and fragmentation strategy of a table The Info option is also available from the TABLE menu which is described in Displaying Table Information on page 5 83 In addition you can use the SQL statement INFO for the same purpose It is described in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Select the Info option on the SQL menu DB Access displays the INFO FOR TABLE screen as shown in Figure 3 13 a Figure 3 13 INFO FOR TABLE gt gt Choose a table with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The INFO FOR TABLE screen stores7 dbserverl customer orders This screen lists the names of tables that exist in the current database If you are not the owner of a table the table name is prefixed by the owner name as in june clients If you are the owner of the table its name appears simply as clients In NLS mode the list of table names is sorted according to the database collation rules defined when the database was created not the current LC_COLLATE setting Thus different users using different collating sequences for DB Access see the table names in the database listed in the same order The Query language Menu Option 3 19 Displaying Table Information If the list of tables does not fit on one screen the last entry is an ellipsis Use the Arrow keys to highlight the ellipsis and the next page of table na
272. s Option The Privileges Option The References Option The Status Option The cOnstraints Option Selecting the Reference Option Selecting the Primary Option 3 3 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 12 3 12 3 13 3 13 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 18 3 19 3 22 3 23 3 23 3 23 3 24 3 24 3 25 3 26 Selecting the Check Option Selecting the Unique Option Selecting the Defaults oe The triGgers Option The Table Option The Fragments Option Dropping an SQL Statement 3 2 DB Access User Manual 3 27 3 27 3 28 3 28 3 29 3 30 3 30 his chapter describes how to use the features of the Query language option on the DB Access main menu Select this option if you want to work with the Informix implementation of Structured Query Language SQL To work with databases and tables you can either enter an SQL statement or select the Database or Table option from the DB Access main menu This chapter discusses the first method which involves using a text editor For information on using a text editor a map of the DB Access main menu and an overview of how to work with menu text entry and HELP screens refer to Chapter 1 Working with DB Access For complete details on how to construct and use SQL statements see the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial the Informix Guide to SQL Reference and the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax shows the syntax fo
273. s RETURN and DB Access disconnects from the database server and closes the database If you do not want to disconnect press the N key or use the right Arrow key to highlight No and press RETURN DB Access returns you to the CONNECTION menu You also can issue the DISCONNECT statement which severs the connection to a database and database server that you established with a CONNECT statement For details see Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option and the discussion of the CONNECT and DISCONNECT statements in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax A database that has transaction logging prompts you to confirm or roll back any transactions when you explicitly disconnect from the current database environment The TRANSACTION menu appears as shown in Figure 6 7 Figure 6 7 TRANSACTION Rollback The TRANSACTION Commit the current transaction menu for databases with transactions An implicit disconnect and CLOSE DATABASE statement occurs when you connect to a new database environment without explicitly disconnecting from the current one If the database has transaction logging the TRANSACTION menu appears and you are prompted to confirm or roll back transactions 6 8 DB Access User Manual Disconnecting from a Database Environment The TRANSACTION menu ensures that you either commit or roll back an active transaction before closing the current database You have the following menu options m T
274. s an overview of how to use DB Access with the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and the INFORMIX SE database server It explains how to use your terminal and the system editor how to invoke the utility and how to use the various screens and menus It also illustrates and describes the DB Access main menu structure and tells how to get on line Help Chapter 2 Creating Databases and Tables is a tutorial style chapter that illustrates how to create modify drop and select databases and tables using either a main menu option or an SQL statement It also introduces the Interactive Schema Editor ISED and the Informix implementation of SQL Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option illustrates and describes how to use the various menus and screens when you select the Query language option from the DB Access main menu Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option illustrates and describes how to use the various menus and screens when you select the Database option from the DB Access main menu Chapter 5 The Table Menu Option illustrates and describes how to use the various menus and screens when you select the Table option from the DB Access main menu Chapter 6 The Connection and Session Menu Options illustrates and describes how to use the various menus and screens when you select the Connection option or the Session option from the DB Access main menu Appendix A illustrates and briefly describes all the command
275. s on the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Setting the Initial Extent Size When you create a table using INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server you can specify how much disk space you want to reserve for the table OnLine stores data in units called disk pages It manages disk pages dynamically by reserving an initial extent size When this initial extent becomes full OnLine reserves a next extent When that extent becomes full OnLine adds another extent of next extent size and so on You can find additional information about OnLine table sizing in several manuals For information on general allocation strategies see the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide See Chapter 3 in the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Performance Guide for the calculations involved in choosing extent sizes Specifying extent sizes is optional the default size for both initial and additional extents is eight 1 kilobyte blocks However if you use the default extent sizes for a large table you might exceed the maximum number of extents allowed per tblspace which causes an out of extents error In addition the default value might vary depending on your platform To specify an initial extent size select the eXtent_size option on the TABLE_OPTIONS menu Press the X key or simply press RETURN DB Access displays the Extent Size screen as shown in Figure 5 24 Figure 5 24 Specify initial extent size in kilobytes The Extent Size Page 1 of 1 Column
276. s shown in Figure 5 93 Figure 5 93 INFO FOR TRIGGER gt gt The INFO FOR Choose a trigger with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return TRIGGER menu Choose a trigger from the list of trigger names in the current table If you do not want to choose a trigger press the Interrupt key and you return to the TABLE INFO menu If the header and body information for the selected trigger fit on one screen the INFO menu reappears and displays the trigger information as shown in Figure 5 94 D Figure 5 94 INFO updrec_t tases CONStraints EriGgers Table Exit Display header and body information for a trigger Display of trigger information on the Press CTRL W for Help INFO menu create trigger updrec_t unit_price on stock referencing old as pre_upd new as post_upd insert into log_record values stock_num CURRENT pre_upd unit_price post_upd unit_price for each row The header information for a trigger consists of the CREATE TRIGGER statement and trigger name the SQL statement that triggers an event and the referencing clause The body of a trigger is the triggered action For more information on triggers see the CREATE TRIGGER statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax If the trigger is found and the text is too long to fit on a single INFO menu screen the RUN screen appears with the first page of trigger text and the Next option is highlighted Keep pressing RETURN until you see all
277. similar results by using the Modify option on the CREATE TABLE menu as described in Modifying a Column ina Table on page 5 21 The ALTER TABLE Screen Select the Alter option on the TABLE menu and DB Access displays the ALTER TABLE prompt as shown in Figure 5 46 ALTER TABLE gt gt Figure 5 46 Enter the table name you wish to alter with the schema editor The ALTER TABLE prompt items orders This menu displays the names of tables that are defined in the current database At the prompt enter the name of the table you want to alter or use the Arrow keys to highlight the table name in the list DB Access displays the ALTER TABLE menu as shown in Figure 5 47 0 Figure 5 47 ALTER TABLE clients Add Modify Drop Screen Table_options Constraints Exit Adds columns to the table above the line with the highlight The ALTER TABLE menu with OnLine Page 1 of mydata mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help Column Name Type Length Index Nulls customer_num Serial Unique No fname Char Yes iname Char Yes company Char Yes The Table Menu Option 5 55 The ALTER TABLE Screen The ALTER TABLE menu displays the following options with OnLine Add adds a new column to the table Modify modifies the structure of an existing column Drop drops an existing column from the table Screen scrolls down the screen and displays new text Table_options sets the next extent size and the lock mode for the table Co
278. sing the Session Option On the DB Access main menu press the S key or highlight the Session option and press RETURN The DB Access main menu remains on the screen and information about the current DB Access session appears as shown in Figure 6 8 through Figure 6 10 Session information includes the database server name whether it is OnLine or SE the hostname and connections whether the database server supports NLS or has other capabilities and corresponding NLS attributes if it supports NLS Figure 6 8 shows the following information m The database server for this session is OnLine connected to the server named coral on the host named tuamotu It is a multithreaded database server m The OnLine database server supports NLS distributed databases and INFORMIX TP XA The NLS settings are for the fr_FR 88591 collating sequence and C Ctype the character classification type for the C language Figure 6 8 DB Access Query language Connection Database Table Exit DB Access main Retrieve information about the current DB Access session j menu with sample session information Server for an OnLine coral database server OnLine Connected to host tuamotu Multi threaded Capabilities NLS Distributed XA NLS Capabilities and Attributes fr_FR 88591 Collating Sequence C CType 6 10 DB Access User Manual Choosing the Session Option Figure 6 9 shows that the database server for this session is INFORMIX SE connecte
279. skip this chapter and Chapter 2 Creating Databases and Tables and go directly to the relevant sections of the subsequent reference chapters or appendixes Working with DB Access 1 3 What Is DB Access What Is DB Access DB Access is a utility that lets you access and manipulate the data in a relational database and perform a variety of data management tasks such as organizing storing retrieving and viewing data A database is a collection of information or data that is arranged in tables In turn the tables are made up of rows and columns The stores7 database provided with your database server is described in detail in Appendix A of the Informix Guide to SQL Reference Database fundamentals are introduced in Chapter 1 in the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial You can use DB Access menus and screens to create drop and close databases create modify and drop tables enter modify and retrieve infor mation in a database connect to a database server and obtain information about the current session Differences Between OnLine and SE The DB Access utility is packaged with both the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server and the INFORMIX SE database server DB Access functionality differs in several ways depending on the database server you are using Using the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server m The Table_options option on the CREATE TABLE menu in the Interac tive Schema Editor ISED has different options than does the sTo
280. splays an error message You return to the CONNECTION menu and the name of the specified database appears showing the name of the database server on the fourth line of the menu header for example moorea coral To see information about the database server use the Session option on the DB Access main menu which is described later in this chapter To leave the SELECT DATABASE screen without selecting a database press the Interrupt key You return to the CONNECTION menu but your database server connection is not severed You also can issue the CONNECT statement to connect to a database server and select a database For details see Chapter 3 The Query language Menu Option in this manual and the discussion of the CONNECT statement in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax The Connection and Session Menu Options 6 7 Disconnecting from a Database Environment Disconnecting from a Database Environment To disconnect from the current database server and close the current database shown on the fourth line on the screen choose the Disconnect option from the CONNECTION menu The DISCONNECT confirmation screen appears as shown in Figure 6 6 Figure 6 6 DISCONNECT No The DISCONNECT Disconnect from the current database environment confirmation screen When you select the Disconnect option from the CONNECTION menu you must confirm your decision on the DISCONNECT confirmation screen The default is Yes Pres
281. ssigning and changing database data types with the CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE statements see Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax and Chapter 9 in the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial The Table Menu Option 5 15 Adding a Column to a Table If a data type requires additional information DB Access displays a screen that prompts you for this information For example defining a column as type CHARACTER causes DB Access to display the ADD LENGTH screen so you can specify the length of the CHARACTER field Defining a TEXT or BYTE type causes DB Access to display the ADD BLOBSPACE screen Specifying the Column Length or Other Parameters When you specify various data types on the ADD TYPE screen a new ADD screen appears asking you to specify the column length or other defining characteristics You must enter the following information in the Length field for these data types Char Specify a length the default is 20 Nchar Specify a length the default is 20 Number For DECIMAL type only enter the length and scale the default is 16 2 DB Access displays only the first 16 digits of decimal values Serial Enter the starting number the default is 1 Money Specify a length the default is 16 2 Datetime Specify first to last datetime qualifiers Interval Specify first to last interval qualifiers Varchar Specify a maximum length from 1 to 255 bytes and a minimum space from 0 to 255 bytes Nvarchar Specify a maximu
282. t database through menu options or by issuing an SQL statement as described in the following list m Using the Connect option on the CONNECTION menu m Using the Select option on the DATABASE menu m Running the SQL statement CONNECT or DATABASE from the SQL menu Creating a Database You can select an existing database or create your own With DB Access you can create a database in the following ways m Using the Create option on the DATABASE menu m Running the SQL statement CREATE DATABASE from the SQL menu Dropping a Database With DB Access you can drop a database in the following ways m Using the Drop option on the DATABASE menu m Running the SQL statement DROP DATABASE from the SQL menu Closing a Database With DB Access you can close a database in the following ways Using the cLose option on the DATABASE menu Using the Disconnect option on the CONNECTION menu to close the current database and disconnect from a database environment Running the SQL statement CLOSE DATABASE from the SQL menu Running the SQL statement DISCONNECT from the SQL menu to close the current database and disconnect from a database environment Creating Databases and Tables 2 7 Getting Database Information GLS 2 8 DB Access User Manual Getting Database Information With DB Access you can get dbspaces NLS and stored procedure information about a database only through the Info option on the DATABASE menu Working with a Tabl
283. t does not join the two subservient tables An INTO TEMP clause selects the results into a temporary table SELECT c customer_num Iname o order_num order_date call_dtime FROM customer c OUTER orders o OUTER cust_calls x WHERE c customer_num o customer_num AND c customer_num x customer_num INTO temp service sel_order sql The following example queries on table data using the ORDER BY and WHERE clauses In this SELECT statement the comparison bicycle LIKE condi tion or bicycle for a MATCHES condition specifies the letters bicycle followed by any sequence of zero or more characters It narrows the search further by adding another comparison condition that excludes a manu_code of PRC SELECT FROM stock WHERE description LIKE bicycle AND manu_code NOT LIKE PRC ORDER BY description manu_code sel_sub sql The following example queries on table data using a subquery This self join uses a correlated subquery to retrieve and list the 10 highest priced items ordered SELECT order_num total_price FROM items a WHERE 10 gt SELECT COUNT FROM items b WHERE b total_price lt a total_price ORDER BY total_price A 14 DB Access User Manual sel_union sq sel_union sql The following example uses the UNION clause to query on data in two tables The compound query performs a union on the stock_num and manu_code columns in the stock and items tables The statement selects items that have a unit p
284. t spell a command exactly as shown and must use lowercase letters variable A word in italics represents a value that you must supply such as a database file or program name A table following the diagram explains the value flag A flag is usually an abbreviation for a function menu or option name or for a compiler or preprocessor argument You must enter a flag exactly as shown including the preceding hyphen ext A filename extension such as sql or cob might follow a variable that represents a filename Type this extension exactly as shown immediately after the name of the file and a period The extension might be optional in certain products 1 Punctuation and mathematical notations are literal symbols that you must enter exactly as shown Single quotes are literal symbols that you must enter as shown Privileges p 5 17 A reference in a box represents a subdiagram on the same page if no page is supplied or another page Imagine that the subdiagram is spliced into the main di agram at this point A shaded option is the default If you do not explicitly eS type the option it will be in effect unless you choose an other option gt gt Syntax enclosed in a pair of arrows indicates that this is 12 DB Access User Manual a subdiagram 1 of 2 setenv Element Command Line Conventions Description The vertical line is a terminator and indi
285. t the screen and select the Build new table option on the EXIT menu DB Access returns you to the TABLE menu The Table Menu Option 5 61 Using the Screen Option on the ALTER TABLE Menu Using the Screen Option on the ALTER TABLE Menu Select the Screen option from the ALTER TABLE menu to display the next screen of column definitions in the schema editor If you choose Screen at the last screen of definitions DB Access redisplays the first screen Tip If the table does not contain more than one screen of column definitions the Screen option has no effect Changing Table Options with the ALTER TABLE Menu If you use INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server select the Table_options option from the ALTER TABLE menu to change the next extent size or lock mode for a table in an OnLine database or to alter the fragmentation strategy of a table The TABLE_OPTIONS menu appears and guides you through the steps necessary to modify various options for the table as shown in Figure 5 50 Figure 5 50 TABLE_OPTIONS clients El eXtent_size Next_size Lock_mode Rowids Exit The Define dbspace or fragmentation strategy for table storage TABLE_OPTIONS Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help menu Column Name Type Length Index Nulls The TABLE_OPTIONS menu displays the following options Storage lets you alter a table by changing the dbspace in which to store the data or define or alter the fragmentation strategy for storing the records in the ta
286. tabase environment 2 51 6 8 Disk space managing with Extent Size screen 5 31 reserving for OnLine table 5 31 Distributed databases NLS code sets for 4 4 NLS environment variable settings 4 4 requesting table information on another server 3 22 DROP DATABASE screen how to exit 4 21 selecting from the DATABASE menu 4 20 two ways to drop a database 4 20 DROP DATABASE statement 2 50 Drop option ALTER TABLE menu 2 32 5 56 confirmation screen for dropping command files 3 32 CREATE TABLE menu 5 9 5 10 SQL menu 3 31 DROP TABLE statement 2 50 Dropping a column confirming your decision 5 61 with the ALTER TABLE menu 5 61 Dropping a command file confirming your decision 3 32 from a menu 3 30 6 DB Access User Manual Dropping a database confirming your decision 4 21 from a menu 4 20 two ways to do it 2 7 using a menu option 2 37 Dropping a table confirming your decision 5 95 from a menu 5 94 two ways to do it 2 9 using a menu option 2 35 Dropping an SQL statement confirming your decision 3 32 from a menu 3 30 E Editing SQL statements with the SQL editor 1 36 with the system editor 1 39 Editor adding check constraint values with 5 41 definition of the Interactive Schema Editor 2 10 editing SOL statements with the system editor 3 10 for column default types 5 46 for column default values 5 47 for new SQL statements 3 5 including comments in text 1 38 modifying SQL statements 3 9 restrictions 1 38 schema 2 21 SQL 1 3
287. tabase server DB Access is one of many application programming interfaces APIs appli cation development tools and utilities produced by Informix Software Inc Application development tools currently available include products such as INFORMIX SQL INFORMIX 4GL and INFORMIX NewEra SQL APIs currently available include INFORMIX ESOL C and INFORMIX ESQL COBOL If you are running client applications developed with Version 4 1 and 5 0 application development tools you must use INFORMIX NET to connect the client to the network Introduction 5 Demonstration Database DB Access provides much of the same functionality as the INFORMIX SQL database management product However DB Access does not allow users to create and compile custom reports or forms or to create and run custom menus These features are available only in INFORMIX SQL Demonstration Database The DB Access utility which is provided with your Informix database server products includes a demonstration database called stores7 that contains information about a fictitious wholesale sporting goods distributor The sample command files that make up a demonstration application are also included Most examples in this manual are based on the stores7 demonstration database The stores7 database is described in detail and its contents are listed in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference The script that you use to install the demonstration database is called dbaccessdemo7 and is
288. tatements are listed in the example they are not delimited by semicolons To use this SQL code for a specific product you must apply the syntax rules for that product For example if you are using the Query language option of DB Access you must delimit multiple statements with semicolons If you are using an SQL API you must use EXEC SQL and a semicolon or other appro priate delimiters at the start and end of each statement respectively For instance you might see the code in the following example CONNECT TO stores 7 DELETE FROM customer WHERE customer_num 121 COMMIT WORK DISCONNECT CURRENT Dots in the example indicate that more code would be added in a full application but it is not necessary to show it to describe the concept being discussed For detailed directions on using SQL statements for a particular application development tool or SQL API see the manual for your product 14 DB Access User Manual Additional Documentation Additional Documentation The documentation set includes printed manuals on line manuals and on line help This section describes the following pieces of the documentation set m Printed documentation m On line documentation m Related reading Printed Documentation The following printed manuals are included in the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server documentation set m Depending on the database server you are using you or your system administrator will need either t
289. te You can insert as many columns in the table as you want When you add a column to a table DB Access assigns a null value to each row for each new column unless there is a default value For this reason you cannot add a column that disallows null values to an existing table You can however add a column and modify it to disallow nulls in a later ALTER TABLE statement Modifying a Column in a Table Include a MODIFY clause in an ALTER TABLE statement to perform one or all of the following actions depending on specific syntax in the clause Changing the data type of a column Changing the length of a character column Allowing or disallowing null values in a column Adding or changing the default value for a column Creating Databases and Tables 2 45 Dropping a Column from a Table If you create a SMALLINT column and then decide that you need to store integers larger than 32 767 you need to change the data type for the column to INTEGER The following example changes the data type of the item_num column in the items table from SMALLINT to INTEGER ALTER TABLE items MODIFY item_num INTEGER Similarly you can increase the length of a CHAR column The following example changes the length of the company and city columns in the customer table to 30 characters and 20 characters respectively ALTER TABLE customer MODIFY company CHAR 30 city CHAR 20 The following example modifies the existing company column to disallow n
290. ter a name then press Return The DETACH DBSPACE screen for Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help expression fragmentation strategy dbspace2 dbspace3 The DETACH DBSPACE screen displays a list of dbspaces from the current strategy of the table and prompts you to select the one from which you want the records copied into a new table The default or current selection is highlighted The Table Menu Option 5 79 The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu No Fragmentation You can select a dbspace from the list or type ina dbspace name If you enter an invalid dbspace name you see an error message The NEW TABLE Screen After you have correctly entered a dbspace on the DETACH DBSPACE screen the NEW TABLE screen appears as shown in Figure 5 73 E Figure 5 73 NEW TABLE gt gt Enter the name you want assigned to the new table then press Return The NEW TABLE screen for Page 1 of 1 newstores mydbserv Press CTRL W for Help expression fragmentation strategy The NEW TABLE screen prompts you to enter the name you want assigned to the new table This table stores the records from the dbspace you previously selected through the DETACH DBSPACE screen You then return to the ALTER FRAGMENT expression fragmentation strategy menu The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu No Fragmentation If a table has no fragmentation strategy the ALTER FRAGMENT menu appears as shown in Figure 5 74 when you select the Fragment option on the STORAGE menu Fi
291. tering or Defining a Fragmentation Strategy The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Round robin n Strategy The SELECT DBSPACE Screen The FRAGMENT Menu The ATTACH TABLES Menu The DETACH DBSPACE Menu The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy The SELECT DBSPACE Menu The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu The ATTACH TABLES Menu The DETACH DBSPACE Screen The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu No Fragmentation A The FRAGMENT Menu a a Displaying Table Information The Columns Option The Indexes Option The Privileges Option The References Option 5 2 DB Access User Manual The Status Option 2 6 a 587 The cOnstraints Option E es Bose en a D 0 Selecting the Reference Option SC e free Uy 2 ets ty sE 0288 Selecting the Primary Option 2 5 90 Selecting the Check Option a a a 2 1 5 90 Selecting the Unique Option 2 2 2 2 2 9 91 Selecting the Defaults Option 2 2 5 91 The triGgers Option a D 2 2 ee ee ee ee e 59D The Table Option staae dor oe he s ee 9 93 The Fragments Option 2 2 2 ew ew 9 93 Dropping a Table 2 2 2 2 ew 0 594 Confirming Your Decision 2 2 we ee eee 9 95 Exiting the DROP TABLE Screen 2 2 1 2 1 ww 995 The Table Menu Option 5 3 5 4 DB Access User Manual his chapter describes how to use the features of the Table option on the DB Access main menu Select this option if you want t
292. text is too long to fit on a single INFO menu screen the RUN screen appears with the first page of trigger text and the Next option is highlighted Keep pressing RETURN until you see all the trigger information Select Restart at any time to display the trigger infor mation from the beginning and then press RETURN to continue viewing the results or Exit to return to the SOL menu The Table Option Select the Table option to redisplay the INFO FOR TABLE menu as shown in Figure 3 31 so you can select a new table about which to request information INFO FOR TABLE gt gt Figure 3 31 gt gt Choose a table with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The INFO FOR TABLE menu stores7 dbserverl Press CTRL W for Help customer orders The Query language Menu Option 3 29 The Fragments Option The Fragments Option Figure 3 32 shows the kind of information you see when you select the Fragments option for a table created with a round robin fragmentation strategy Figure 3 32 Db Bowe Display of dbspaces dbspacel for round robin dbspace2 fragmentation Figure 3 33 shows the kind of information you see when you select the Fragments option for a table created with an expression fragmentation strategy Figure 3 33 Db E ssion SPARS ape Display of dbspaces dbspacel c 1 and expressions for dbspace2 c 2 expression fragmentation Dropping an SQL Statement If dbaccessdemo7 has been run you
293. the SQL editor or a user specified system editor User assigns the login name of the current user as the default value Current assigns the current time taken from the system clock as the default value Null assigns null as the default value Today assigns the current system date as the default value Db server assigns the current database server name as the default value name Site name assigns the current site name as the default value m Ifyou select User Null Today Db server name or Site name the system assigns that value to the default type and returns you to the DEFAULTS menu in add mode m If you select Current as the default value the qualifier is taken from the column definition m If you enter a default value and the type is DATETIME or INTERVAL you enter only the value the qualifier comes from the column definition m Ifyou select Literal as the default type the ADD DEFAULT VALUE menu appears letting you assign a literal as the default value 5 46 DB Access User Manual Defining Constraints The ADD DEFAULT VALUE menu shown in Figure 5 37 lets you add or modify the default value for a column in the current table using either the SQL editor or a system editor Figure 5 37 ADD DEFAULT VALUE column7 New Modify Use editor Exit The ADD DEFAULT Enter a new default value using the SOL editor VALUE menu The ADD DEFAULT VALUE menu displays the following options New enters a new default value
294. the table one column at a time As you define each column DB Access prompts you for information Most of the prompts are in the form of menus so you can select the appro priate response quickly and easily Some screens require you to enter something other than a menu selection such as the name of the column As you respond to these prompts DB Access puts your information in the schema You move from left to right across the screen as you define each column and from top to bottom as you define additional columns Naming the Columns Select the Add option on the CREATE TABLE menu and DB Access displays the ADD NAME screen and prompts you for the column name as shown in Figure 2 21 Figure 2 21 Using menu options to create a table Page 1 of 1 mydata mynewdb Press CTRL W for Help naming the columns ADD NAME gt gt Enter column name RETURN adds it INTERRUPT returns to CREATE ALTER menu Column Name Type Length Index Nulls II Enter customer_num for the column name and press RETURN When you select column names you must follow the same guidelines that apply to table names You must use a different name for each column within a single table so DB Access can identify each column Creating Databases and Tables 2 21 Calling Up the Table Schema Defining the Data Type of a Column You can store many kinds of data in a table such as dates zip codes names part numbers part descriptions sal
295. tings do not match DB Access displays an error message and the proper settings for the database m DB Access returns an error if an NLS database server tries to access a non NLS database You must unset DBNLS and try again m DB Access returns an error if a non NLS database server tries to access an NLS database You must set DBNLS and try again m In distributed operations all accessed databases must use the same code sets LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE settings or access is denied The Connection and Session Menu Options 6 3 Choosing the Connection Option GLS m n distributed operations the locale names LANG and LC_COLLATE settings for the client and server must match or the connection is denied See Chapter 1 in the Guide to GLS Functionality for infor mation on locales m See Chapter 4 in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference and Chapter 2 in the Guide to GLS Functionality for information about setting environment variables Choosing the Connection Option On the DB Access main menu press the C key or highlight the Connection option and press RETURN to call up the CONNECTION menu as shown in Figure 6 1 Figure 6 1 CONNECTION Disconnect Connect to a database environment The CONNECTION menu The CONNECTION menu displays the following options Connect connects to a database environment Disconnect disconnects from the database environment Exit exits the CONNECTION menu and returns you to the DB Access mai
296. to display the check constraints affecting columns in the current table Figure 3 26 is an example of a possible display Figure 3 26 CONSTRAINTS mytab Reference Primary Check Unique Defaults Exit Display check constraints The CONSTRAINTS menu with check constraint Constraint name Value information cons2 column1 gt column2 100 1000 column1l 2 column2 20 40 3 55 column2 77 column1 column2 gt column3 column3 gt 100 Selecting the Unique Option Select the Unique option to display the unique constraints affecting columns in the current table Figure 3 27 is an example of a possible display of nanan i Figure 3 27 CONSTRAINTS mytab Reference Primary Check Unique Defaults Exit Display unique constraints The CONSTRAINTS menu with unique constraint Constraint Name Column Name information cons2 column1 column2 cons3 column3 cons4 column35 The Query language Menu Option 3 27 The triGgers Option Selecting the Defaults Option Select the Defaults option to display the defaults affecting columns in the current table If the default type is a literal it also displays the value Figure 3 28 is an example of a possible display Figure 3 28 CONSTRAINTS mytab Reference Primary Check Unique Exit The CONETEAINTS Display column defaults y menu with default value information Column Name Type Value cons Null cons6 Literal cons7 User cons8 Today The
297. to which you want to move all the records from the current table strategy The SELECT DBSPACE screen appears rOwids adds a rowid column to the table being initialized The ADD ROWIDS menu appears Exit exits the FRAGMENT menu and returns to the ALTER FRAGMENT menu m Use the Dbspace option to move all fragments from the current strategy into one dbspace resulting in a table that is no longer fragmented m Use the rOwids option to add rowids to the current table Rowid usage and access is outlined in the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide Informix Guide to SQL Reference and Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial The ADD ROWIDS Menu Select the rOwids option from the FRAGMENT menu and the ADD ROWIDS menu appears as shown in Figure 5 58 Figure 5 58 ADD ROWIDS No The ADD ROWIDS Enable rowids for the table menu for round robin strategy The ADD ROWIDS menu displays the following options which let you indicate whether you want rowids added to the table that is being initialized Yes enables rowids for the current table No does not enable rowids for the current table The Table Menu Option 5 69 The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Round robin Strategy The ATTACH TABLES Menu Select the aTtach option on the ALTER FRAGMENT round robin strategy menu and the ATTACH TABLES menu appears as shown in Figure 5 59 Figure 5 59 ATTACH TABLES new_acet ada Modify Drop Screen Exit The ATTACH Add one
298. tor and a system editor Using the SQL Editor The DB Access utility includes an internal text editor called the SQL editor When you select the New or Modify option on the SOL menu and enter text on the screen you are using the SQL editor 1 36 DB Access User Manual Using the SQL Editor The screen that appears when you select the New option shown in Figure 1 10 or the Modify option indicates the editing keys you can use Done editing Delete character CTRL A CTRL D CTRL R CTRL X ESC CTRL A y I t CTRL R Red Figure 1 10 ypeover Inser R Redraw CTRL D Delete rest of line SQL statement text entry screen and SQL editor keys Note that the position of the cursor is below the header indicating where you enter text on the screen If you make a mistake while using the SOL editor move the cursor with the RETURN and Arrow keys and retype the text as needed Using the Editing Keys Use the editing keys listed at the top of a NEW or MODIFY text entry screen to perform special functions when you enter SOL statements Switches between insert mode and typeover mode You are automatically in typeover mode when you begin using the SQL editor In insert mode the text beneath the cursor shifts to the right as you enter new characters In typeover mode characters you enter replace the text beneath the cursor Deletes characters from the current cursor position through the end of the line Redraws the cu
299. ttings for the database In distributed operations all accessed databases must use the same code sets LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE settings or access is denied DB Access returns an error if an NLS database server tries to access a non NLS database You must unset DBNLS and try again DB Access returns an error if a non NLS database server tries to access an NLS database You must set DBNLS and try again See Chapter 4 in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference for information on setting environment variables GLS See the Guide to GLS Functionality for information about GLS environment 4 4 DB Access User Manual variables and features Choosing the Database Option Choosing the Database Option On the DB Access main menu press the D key or highlight the Database option and press RETURN to call up the DATABASE menu as shown in Figure 4 1 DATABASE Create Info Drop cLose Exit The ane Select a database to work with menu The DATABASE menu displays the following options Select makes a database the current database See Selecting a Database on page 4 6 Create builds a new database and makes that database the current database See Creating a Database on page 4 9 Info displays information about the current database See Displaying Database Information on page 4 15 Drop removes a database from the system See Dropping a Database on page 4 20 cLose closes the current database See Cl
300. u on page 2 29 Creating Databases and Tables 2 25 Exiting the Schema Editor After you finish building a schema for the clients table the screen looks similar to the example shown in Figure 2 27 Figure 2 27 CREATE TABLE clients aad Modify Drop Screen Table_options Constraints Exit U x g ti Adds columns to the table above the line with the highlight sing menu op fons to create a table Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help sample completed Column Name Type Length Index Nulls table schema OnLine customer_num Serial Unique No fname Char Yes 1name Char Yes company Char Yes addressl Char Yes address2 Char Yes city Char Yes state Char Yes zipcode Char Yes phone Char Yes gt gt The clients table created in this chapter is similar to the customer table that is included in the stores7 demonstration database Exiting the Schema Editor After you enter the final piece of information which defines the last column phone in the clients table the schema is complete Press the Interrupt key and the CREATE TABLE menu reappears 2 26 DB Access User Manual Specifying Column Constraints Select the Exit option The EXIT menu appears as shown in Figure 2 28 and displays the table schema Figure 2 28 EXIT clients Discard new table Using menu options Builds a new table and returns to the Table Menu to create a table the Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help EXIT menu Column Name Type Length Ind
301. u options 5 88 with referenced information 5 89 with referencing information 5 89 Referenced constraints information on 3 26 References displaying for a table 3 21 5 84 displaying information with the References option 3 23 Referencing constraints information on 3 25 REMOVE menu for dropping a column 5 61 shown 5 27 RENAME COLUMN statement definition of 2 47 Reserved words restrictions on 5 12 Restrictions for SQL editor 1 38 on reserved words 5 12 RETURN key 1 12 Rolling back transactions with the TRANSACTIONS menu 4 22 6 9 Round robin strategy ALTER FRAGMENT menu in DB Access 5 67 DB Access FRAGMENT menu 5 50 DB Access ROUND_ROBIN menu 5 50 DB Access SELECT DBSPACE screen 5 51 Row option LOCK MODE menu 5 33 Rowid ADD ROWIDS menu for expression strategy 5 75 ADD ROWIDS menu for round robin strategy 5 69 ADD ROWIDS menu in DB Access 5 69 displaying ALTER ROWIDS menu in DB Access 5 65 Rows locking 5 32 Run option Exit option 3 8 3 29 5 92 Next option for viewing data 3 8 Next option for viewing trigger data 3 29 5 92 Restart option to redisplay results 3 8 Restart option to redisplay trigger data 3 29 5 92 SQL menu 3 6 Running SQL statements when there are errors 3 7 when there are no errors 3 7 S Save option rules for naming saved files 3 18 SQL menu 3 18 Saving command files 3 18 Schema building with the schema editor 2 21 5 19 calling with the Table option on the main menu 2 20
302. ual Read this chapter for an overview of the information provided in this manual and for an under standing of the conventions used throughout this manual About This Manual The DB Access User Manual is a complete guide to the features that comprise the Informix DB Access relational database access utility You can use DB Access with INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server or the INFORMIX SE data base server The DB Access User Manual describes how to invoke the DB Access utility to access modify and retrieve information from Informix database servers The DB Access User Manual is a combination user guide and reference manual m Chapter 1 covers important basic information about the utility m Chapter 2 is a tutorial style chapter that walks you through some of the main features m Ifyou are already familiar with DB Access you can skip Chapter 2 and go directly to the appropriate sections of Chapter 3 through 6 Each of these reference style chapters discusses a specific option on the DB Access main menu and contains instructions and illustrations that show you how to take full advantage of the features and functionality of DB Access Introduction 3 Organization of This Manual 4 DB Access User Manual Organization of This Manual This manual includes the following chapters This Introduction provides an overview of the manual and describes the documentation conventions used Chapter 1 Working with DB Access provide
303. ull values ALTER TABLE customer MODIFY company CHAR 30 NOT NULL Important There are restrictions on changing certain data types to certain other data types For a discussion of data type conversion see Chapter 3 in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference Dropping a Column from a Table A table cannot contain two columns with the same name If you accidentally add a column in the wrong location you must delete it first and then add it in the correct location Use the ALTER TABLE statement with the DROP keyword to drop a column and its data The following statement drops the manage_phone column from the customer table ALTER TABLE customer DROP manage_phone 2 46 DB Access User Manual Renaming a Column in a Table Renaming a Column in a Table Use the RENAME COLUMN statement not the ALTER TABLE statement to change the name of a column in a table For example to rename the customer_num column in the customer table to cust_number run the following statement RENAME COLUMN customer customer_num TO cust_number When you rename a column indexes and privileges are modified automatically to include the new name Important RENAME COLUMN is an extension to ANSI syntax If you set DBANSIWARN or specify the ansi parameter a warning message appears Adding and Dropping Constraints You can use the ALTER TABLE statement instead of the schema editor to add or drop a constraint for a column in a table The follow
304. ults displays columns in the specified table that have default values Exit leaves the CONSTRAINTS menu and returns you to the INFO menu Selecting the Reference Option When you select the Reference option from the CONSTRAINTS menu the REFERENCE menu appears as shown in Figure 5 86 Figure 5 86 REFERENCE mytab Referencing referenceD Exit The REFERENCE Display foreign key constraints menu 5 88 DB Access User Manual The cOnstraints Option The REFERENCE menu lets you display the foreign key referencing constraints and columns of the current table as well as whether cascading deletes are enabled You can also display the referenced columns in which columns of another table reference columns in the current tables as foreign keys Select the Referencing option on the REFERENCE menu to display the foreign key constraints in the current table as shown in Figure 5 87 Figure 5 87 REFERENCE myacct s Referencing referenceD Exit The REFERENCE Display foreign key constraints menu with sub_accounts referencing information Constraint Name Referencing Column Referenced Table Referenced Column r107_13 ref_num accounts acc_num ref_type acc_type Figure 5 87 shows foreign key information that includes the constraint name the referencing columns of the current table the referenced table and its columns and whether cascading deletes are enabled Select the referenceD option on the REFERENCE menu to displa
305. umber Activate the hexadecimal load unload format XLUF feature to process character fields with nonprintable characters in the LOAD and UNLOAD statements The various command line options are shortcuts to a particular DB Access menu or screen or to performing certain functions Unlike using the menu system when you exit from a submenu or submenu and option that you specified from the command line you do not go back to the next higher menu level Instead you exit directly to the operating system command line Calling up the DB Access Main Menu The following diagrams show the syntax for the various DB Access command line options You can enter an option preceded by a hyphen in uppercase or lowercase letters For information on how to read the diagrams see Command Line Conventions in the Introduction Calling up the DB Access Main Menu To begin working with DB Access simply enter dbaccess at the operating system prompt dbaccess This invokes DB Access and displays the main menu as shown in Figure 1 1 Figure 1 1 DB Access fQuery language Connection Database Table Session Exit Th a Use Informix Structured Query Language e z CCeSS main menu Press CTRL W for Help You can select various options from the main menu and work with DB Access as described in The DB Access Main Menu on page 1 29 If you enter dbaccess and DB Access does not display the main menu you might see the following messa
306. uoted character string that exceeds 80 characters such as an INSERT into a long CHAR column use a system editor instead of the SQL editor If you want to include comments in the text there are two forms The standard format for ANSI databases is to preface a comment with a double dash You can enclose comments in curly brackets or preface them with a double dash for non ANSI databases Also use the double dash to comment a single line enclose more than one comment line in curly brackets When you use the SQL editor you can enter as many lines of text as you need You are not limited by the size of the screen although you might be limited by the memory constraints of your system or the maximum SQL statement size of 64 kilobytes If you insert more lines than one screen can hold the SQL editor scrolls down the page with the additional text The beginning and ending line numbers of the current page are displayed on the fourth line of the text entry screen as shown in Figure 1 11 Done editing CTRL A Typeover Insert CTRL R Redraw Figure 1 11 Delete character CTRL D Delete rest of line SQL statement text 3 to 20 of 20 stores7 dbserverl entry screen with scrolling ESC CTRL X 1 38 DB Access User Manual Using a System Editor When you finish entering text with the SQL editor and return to the SQL menu you can select the Save option to save your command file To retrieve a saved command file that
307. ure 5 98 DROP TABLE gt gt Enter the table name you wish to drop from the database The DROP TABLE screen clients customer orders This screen lists the names of tables that exist in the current database You can drop a table in one of the following ways m Type the table name and press RETURN You must use this method and include the full pathname if you want to drop a table that is not in the current database m Use the Arrow keys to highlight the name of the table you want to drop from the database and then press RETURN To drop the orders table for example type orders or highlight it using an Arrow key and press RETURN You also can use the DROP TABLE statement within SQL to drop a table See Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for details 5 94 DB Access User Manual CONFIRM Yes No I do not want to drop it customer orders Confirming Your Decision Confirming Your Decision DB Access displays the CONFIRM screen which asks for confirmation before it drops the table as shown in Figure 5 99 Figure 5 99 The CONFIRM screen The default is No so you cannot drop a table by mistake If you truly want to drop the highlighted table press the Y key or use the right Arrow key to highlight Yes and press RETURN DB Access drops the table Warning When you drop a table all data in the table is deleted Exiting the DROP TABLE Screen To leave the DROP TABLE screen
308. us Option The cOnstraints Option The triGgers Option The Table Option The Fragments Option 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 10 5 19 5 19 5 21 5 27 5 28 5 28 5 29 5 33 5 34 5 49 5 54 5 55 5 57 5 57 5 58 5 59 5 61 5 62 5 62 5 63 5 66 5 67 5 72 5 80 5 83 5 86 5 86 5 86 5 87 5 87 5 88 5 92 5 93 5 93 Table of Contents vii viii Chapter 6 Appendix A Appendix B DB Access User Manual Dropping a Table Confirming Your Decision Exiting the DROP TABLE Screen The Connection and Session Menu Options Choosing the Connection Option Connecting to a Database Evironment Disconnecting from a Database Environment Choosing the Session Option Sample Command Files How to Read On Line Help Index 5 94 5 95 5 95 6 4 6 4 6 10 Introduction About This Manual Organization of This Manual Types of Users Software Dependencies Demonstration Database New Features of This Product Conventions Typographical Conventions Icon Conventions Comment Icons Command Line Conventions Sample Code Conventions Additional Documentation Printed Documentation On Line Documentation On Line Help Error Message Files Release Notes Documentation Notas Machine Notes Related Reading Compliance with Industry Standards Informix Welcomes Your Comments 2 DB Access User Manual his chapter introduces the DB Access User Man
309. using the SQL editor Modify modifies the current default value using the SQL editor Use editor modifies the current default value using a system editor Exit leaves the ADD DEFAULT VALUE menu The DEFAULTS Menu the Modify Option Select the Modify option to modify the Column Name Type or Value fields m If the current field is Column Name the ADD COLUMN NAME prompt appears m Ifthe current field is Type the MODIFY DEFAULT TYPE menu appears See the ADD DEFAULT TYPE menu on page 5 46 m Ifthe current field is Value the MODIFY DEFAULT VALUE menu appears See the ADD DEFAULT VALUE menu on page 5 47 When the value changes you go to the MODIFY DEFAULT VALUE menu to select an editor that lets you enter the default value The DEFAULTS Menu the Drop Option Select the Drop option to drop the current default The DEFAULTS Menu the Screen Option Select the Screen option to display the next page of defaults The Table Menu Option 5 47 Defining Constraints 5 48 DB Access User Manual The DEFAULTS Menu the Exit Option Select the Exit option to leave the DEFAULTS menu and return to the CONSTRAINTS menu Data Validation When you enter a default value DB Access validates your entry The database server validates the literal value and checks the following information The column name must exist The column type cannot be SERIAL If the column does not allow nulls you cannot specify the default t
310. ustomer_num call_code call_dtime res_dtime FROM cust_calls WHERE user_id harald You cannot find out the initial and next extent sizes or the lock mode for a table through the Info option However you can see them if you use the Table_options option on the CREATE TABLE menu whichis available through the Table option on the main menu You can issue a SELECT statement within the SQL menu to access the systables system catalog table The following example displays the initial and next extent sizes for all the tables in the database SELECT tabname fextsize nextsize FROM systables The following example displays the lock mode for all the tables in the database SELECT tabname locklevel FROM systables The SELECT statement is described in detail in Chapter 1 of the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Examples of simple and advanced SELECT statements appear in Chapters 2 and 3 respectively of the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial Creating Databases and Tables 2 49 How to Drop a Table SQL How to Drop a Table SQL Issue the DROP TABLE statement to remove a table from a database You must be the owner of a table or have DBA privileges to drop the table Before you remove a table from the database be sure to select the database that contains the table you want to drop Remember when you drop a table you also lose all its data Unlike the Drop option on the TABLE menu this method does not give you a chance to recon sider
311. ve the correct permissions for the specified database server you are prompted to specify a database to use on that database server The SELECT DATABASE screen appears and the name of the specified database server is highlighted as shown in Figure 6 5 SELECT DATABASE Figure 6 5 gt gt Select a database with the Arrow Keys or enter a name then press Return The SELECT DATABASE screen borabora coral huahinelcoral moorea coral 6 6 DB Access User Manual Connecting to a Database Environment The SELECT DATABASE screen alphabetically lists all available databases on the specified database server The use of this screen is described in Chapter 4 The Database Menu Option The database list on the SELECT DATABASE screen depends on the current connection m If there is no current connection or the current connection is an implicit default connection all the databases listed in the DBPATH environment variable setting are displayed m If there is a current explicit connection all the databases in the DBPATH that pertain to the current server are displayed See Chapter 4 in the Informix Guide to SQL Reference for information on setting the DBPATH environment variable You can select a database by typing the database name or using the Arrow keys to highlight the name of a database and pressing RETURN If you enter the name of a nonexistent database or a database that DB Access cannot locate DB Access di
312. where the data in the table is stored The EXPRESSION menu has the following options Add adds a new expression to the fragmentation strategy The SELECT DBSPACE screen appears with a list of dbspaces for the current OnLine database server Then the EDIT EXPRESSION menu appears for you to define an expression for the dbspace Modify lets you modify an existing expression strategy definition using the EDIT EXPRESSION menu Drop deletes the highlighted expression the current line from the existing fragmentation strategy It does not drop the dbspace from the OnLine database server Screen displays the next screen page of dbspaces for the strategy Exit exits the EXPRESSION menu and returns to the FRAGMENT menu The EXPRESSION menu lets you define an expression fragmentation strategy that will be used to store the records in the current table This menu has two fields Dbspace Name and Expression The Dbspace Name refers to a dbspace in the current OnLine database server The Expression field defines the criteria for inserting a record into the specified dbspace For more information see the discussion of Expression in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax and the discussion of dbspaces in the INFORMIX OnLine Dynamic Server Administrator s Guide 5 52 DB Access User Manual Defining a Fragmentation Strategy Important DB Access does not perform data validation on the expression of the E strategy The SELECT DBSPACE Screen Expr
313. x A ADD CHECK VALUE menu 5 41 ADD DEFAULT TYPE menu 5 46 ADD DEFAULT VALUE menu 5 47 ADD INDEX screen 5 17 Add option ALTER TABLE menu 5 56 CREATE TABLE menu 2 21 5 9 5 10 ADD STARTING NUMBER screen 2 22 ADD STORAGE PATHNAME screen 5 33 ADD TYPE menu 2 22 Alter option TABLE menu 2 30 5 6 ALTER TABLE menu adding a column 2 30 5 58 adding and dropping constraints 2 33 changing table options 5 62 differences from CREATE TABLE menu 5 56 Drop option 2 32 dropping a column 2 32 5 61 how to exit 5 57 modifying a column 2 31 5 59 Screen option 5 62 ALTER TABLE screen selecting from the TABLE menu 5 55 ALTER TABLE statement ADD keyword 2 45 adding and dropping constraints 2 47 DROP keyword 2 46 Altering a table See Modifying a table Altering fragmented tables DB Access ADD ROWIDS menu 5 65 ALTER ROWIDS menu 5 64 DROP ROWIDS menu 5 65 STORAGE menu 5 64 ANSI compliant database and SQLSTATE value 1 22 specifying for OnLine 4 12 specifying for SE 4 14 ANSI checking SQL statements for compliance 1 22 Arrow keys 1 11 BACKSPACE key 1 11 Blobspace specifying for TEXT or BYTE data 5 15 Bourne shell setting environment variables 1 7 1 9 Buffered logging on OnLine 4 13 Building the table schema 2 21 5 8 BYTE data type 5 15 c C shell setting environment variables 1 7 1 9 Cascading deletes enabling 5 38 CHANGE ANYWAY menu schema editor 2 31 CHAR data type 5 13 Check constraints a
314. x Creating Databases and Tables 2 41 How to Select a Database SQL How to Select a Database SQL Issue the CONNECT or the DATABASE statement to select a database as the current database You can specify a user ID or a user ID and password The CONNECT statement connects DB Access to a specified local or remote database and database server or to the default database server the DISCONNECT statement terminates the connection The use of the CONNECT statement is preferred over the DATABASE statement because it more closely conforms to X Open and ANSI standards DATABASE is an Informix extension to ANSI SQL The following example connects to the manihi database on the starfish database server CONNECT TO manihi starfish The following example connects to the tetiaroa database on the starfish database server with a user ID of marae CONNECT TO tetiaroa starfish USER marae If you include the USING clause in your CONNECT statement an error message appears Important CONNECT is an extension to ANSI syntax If you set DBANSIWARN or specify the ansi parameter a warning message appears How to Create a Table SQL Issue the CREATE TABLE statement to create a table in a database You must use the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE statement not the schema editor to create a temporary table Just as you use the schema editor or menus to create a table you can define the following characteristics for each column in the t
315. y Check Unique Defaults Exit The CONSTRAINTS Display check constraints menu with check constraint Constraint name Value information cons2 column1 gt column2 100 1000 columni 2 column2 20 40 3 55 column2 77 column1 column2 gt column3 column3 gt 100 5 90 DB Access User Manual The cOnstraints Option Selecting the Unique Option Select the Unique option on the CONSTRAINTS menu to display the unique constraints placed on columns of the current table as shown in Figure 5 91 Figure 5 91 CONSTRAINTS mytab Reference Primary Check Unique Defaults Exit Display unique constraints The CONSTRAINTS menu with unique constraint Constraint Name Column Name information cons2 columnl column2 cons3 column3 cons4 column35 Selecting the Defaults Option Select the Defaults option on the CONSTRAINTS menu to display the defaults placed on columns in the current table If the default type is a literal it also displays the value Figure 5 92 is an example of a such a display Figure 5 92 CONSTRAINTS mytab Reference Primary Check Unique Exit The EEN Display column defaults menu with default type and value Column Name Type Value information cons5 Null cons6 Literal cons7 User cons8 Today The Table Menu Option 5 91 The triGgers Option The triGgers Option When you select the triGgers option from the INFO menu the INFO FOR TRIGGER menu appears a
316. y tables and their columns which have foreign keys that reference the current table as shown in Figure 5 88 Figure 5 88 REFERENCE myaccts Referencing Exit The REFERENCE Display columns which have foreign keys which reference this table menu with referenced information Constraint Name Referenced Column Referencing Table Referencing Column r107_13 acc_num sub_accounts ref_acc acc_type ref_type Figure 5 88 shows foreign key information that includes the constraint name the referenced columns of the table the referencing table and its columns and whether cascading deletes are enabled After constraint information appears select Exit to return to the CONSTRAINTS menu Select Exit again to return to the INFO menu The Table Menu Option 5 89 The cOnstraints Option Selecting the Primary Option Select the Primary option on the CONSTRAINTS menu to display the primary key constraints placed on columns of the current table as shown in Figure 5 89 Figure 5 89 CONSTRAINTS mytab References Primary Check Unique Defaults Exit The CONSTRAINTS Display primary key constraint menu with primary key constraint information Constraint Name Column Name constraintl columnl column2 Selecting the Check Option Select the Check option on the CONSTRAINTS menu to display the check constraints placed on columns of the current table as shown in Figure 5 90 Figure 5 90 CONSTRAINTS mytab Reference Primar
317. you need and repeat the process When you select Exit to leave the screen the EXIT menu appears Press RETURN to select the default Build new table or press the D key or move the cursor to select the Discard new table option with an Arrow key and press RETURN DB Access accordingly builds or discards the table and returns you to the TABLE menu You can press the Interrupt key at any time to leave an ADD screen without making any changes Modifying a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu Modifying a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu The procedure for using the schema editor to modify a column in a table using the ALTER TABLE menu is the same as for modifying a column in a table with the CREATE TABLE menu The following steps outline how to modify a column 1 Use the Arrow keys to move the highlight to the line and column definition that you want to modify Select the Modify option on the ALTER TABLE menu 2 DB Access displays the appropriate screen for the column you want to modify as shown in the following list Field to Modify Screen Name Column Name MODIFY NAME Column Data Type MODIFY TYPE Column Length MODIFY LENGTH Index on Column MODIFY INDEX Column Allows Nulls MODIFY NULLS The Table Menu Option 5 59 Modifying a Column with the ALTER TABLE Menu GLS 5 60 DB Access User Manual Type each modification on the top line of the screen and press RETURN DB Access makes the change and redisplays the ALTER TABLE
318. you to the ALTER FRAGMENT menu Important You can attach only one table during an ALTER FRAGMENT session 5 76 DB Access User Manual The ALTER FRAGMENT Menu Expression Strategy The SELECT ATTACHING TABLE Screen When you select the Add option on the ATTACH TABLES menu for an expression fragmentation strategy the SELECT ATTACHING TABLE screen appears as shown in Figure 5 68 SELECT ATTACHING TABLE gt gt Figure 5 68 Select a table with the Arrow Keys or enter the name then press Return The SELECT ATTACHING TABLE Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help screen for expression fragmentation cur_acct myacct The SELECT ATTACHING TABLE screen displays a list of available tables and prompts you to select one to attach to the current expression fragmentation strategy A new fragment is added to the strategy as a result of attaching a table Highlight or type in the table name you want and press RETURN The EDIT EXPRESSION Menu After you select an attaching table the EDIT EXPRESSION menu appears as shown in Figure 5 69 Figure 5 69 EDIT EXPRESSION new_acct New Modify Use editor Exit The EDIT Enter a new expression which will determine where a record will be stored e EXPRESSION menu Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help for defining and editing expressions Use the EDIT EXPRESSION menu to define an expression for the new fragment that is created as a result of attaching a table You can use either th
319. ype as Null You can use the default type Current only with a DATETIME column type You can use the default type Db server name only with a column type of CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR or NVARCHAR which has a minimum length of 18 characters You can use the default type Site name only with a column type of CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR or NVARCHAR which has a minimum length of 18 characters You can use the default type Today only with a column type of DATE You can use the default type User only with a column type of CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR or NVARCHAR which has a minimum length of 8 characters Defining a Fragmentation Strategy Defining a Fragmentation Strategy To define a round robin or expression fragmentation strategy for the table you are creating select the Table_options option from the CREATE TABLE menu Next select the Storage option on the TABLE_OPTIONS menu and the STORAGE menu appears as shown in Figure 5 38 Figure 5 38 STORAGE new_acct Fragment Exit The STORAGE menu Select a dbspace in which to store the table for storing table Page 1 of 1 Press CTRL W for Help data and defining fragmentation strategy The STORAGE menu has the following options Dbspace displays a list of available dbspaces for storing the table and prompts for a selection See the discussion of Specifying a Storage Location on page 5 30 Fragment allows you to define a fragmentation strategy for the table you created Exit

DB-Access User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents